Skip to main content

Full text of "A Psychology Of Growth"

See other formats


TEXT FLY WITH IN 
THE BOOK ONLY 

Drenched Book 



K|OU_166221 JS 



OUP 902 26-3-70-5,000^ 

^QSfAANIA UNIVERSITY LIBRARY^ 

Call No. I>*J #*"?!, Accession No. ' ' 

Author 
Title 
This book should be returned on or before the date last marked below. 



A PSYCHOLOGY OF 



Growth 



by BERT I. BEVERLY, M.D. 

Rush Assistant Professor of Pediatrics 

College of Medicine, University of Illinois 

Instructor in Psychology, School of 

Nursing, Presbyterian Hospital, 

Chicago, Illinois 




McGRAW-HILL BOOlCHS^4PANY, INC. 

^ftf""*"' ***** 

New York and London 
1947 



A PSYCHOLOGY OF GROWTH 

COPYRICHT, 1947, BY THE 

MCGRAW-HILL BOOK COMPANY, INC. 

PRINTED IN THE UNITED STATES OF AMERICA 

All rights reserved. This booh, or parts 
thereof, may not be reproduced in any form 
without permission of the publishers. 



FIRST EDITION 



TO MT WIFE 



Preface 

E COURSE in psychology that has been developed 
during the past fifteen years for the instruction of 
students at the Presbyterian Hospital School of Nursing, 
Chicago, Illinois, is the immediate source of most of the 
material for this book. The purpose of the course has 
been to give nurses the understanding of themselves and 
their patients that is essential to a mastery of the art of 
nursing. 

Many clues to adult behavior lie far back in childhood. 
Every presonality is a composite of the attributes with 
which the individual came into the world and the atti- 
tudes and habits of response that he has developed through 
the years. His problems usually have their origins in his 
early life. In order to understand him, therefore, it is 
necessary to study mental growth and development from 
infancy through childhood and adolescence. Such a 
a course of study not only gives the nurse an insight into 
the causes of her patients' behavior but, by helping her to 
trace the origin and development of her own personality 
characteristics, makes her better able to understand her- 
self and to adjust to her environment. 

This is a matter of great importance and no little 
difficulty. Many students enter nursing school imme- 
ditely after high school, when they are still in the 
adolescent period of growth and have to make many per- 
sonal adjustments to society in general. At this already 

vii 



Preface 

complicated stage of their development, they accept the 
additional handicap of leaving home, many of them for 
the first time, and trying to stand on their own feet, meet 
new situations, and solve problems without the accustomed 
support of their families. When students nurses enter the 
hospital they find themselves plunged into a system that 
is both unfamiliar and complicated. Standards are high, 
accuracy and precision are essential. Because patients 
are uncomfortable and frightened, their personality diffi- 
culties are exaggerated and they are usually more exacting 
than the persons with whom the nurses have been ac- 
customed to deal. The students' relations with one an- 
other also are complicated by the diversity of their social, 
religious, and political background and by the inequality 
of their intellectual capacities, manual dexterity, and emo- 
tional maturity. 

Although student nurses generally exhibit a remark- 
able ability to adjust themselves to trying circumstances, 
it is not reasonable to suppose that any of them can be 
wholly exempt from personal difficulties. Some are aided 
by self-confidence, self-reliance, and a feeling of security, 
while others suffer the handicaps of insecurity, a sense of 
inferiority, and irrational fears. The school of nursing 
should be equipped to help them all solve their problems 
and make their adjustments, both as a means of maintain- 
ing their own mental and physical health and to aid them 
in acquiring skill in caring for their patients and making 
them comfortable. For this reason, schools of nursing now 
provide in their curriculums a course in psychology. The 
most thorough of these courses include not only lectures 

viii 



Preface 

and full class discussion, but also private consultations 
with the teachers concerning those personal problems that 
a student may not wish to discuss in class. 

While taking full responsibility for the statements in 
this book, the author is indebted to many colleagues 
and writers for their ideas and has given credit wherever 
possible. The most stimulating and most frequently 
quoted ideas are those of Dr. Franz Alexander, Dr. Arnold 
Gesell, Dr. Ralph Hamill, Dr. Karl Menninger, Prof. 
Hughes Mearns, and Dr. Carleton Washburn. The au- 
thor is indebted to Mrs. Carrie Belle McNeil, Presbyterian 
Hospital, Chicago, for invaluable aid and cooperation in 
working with student nurses and is especially indebted 
to Ruth G. Bergman for editorial assistance and to Doris 
Thompson for research assistance. 

BERT I. BEVERLY. 

Chicago, 111., 
October, 1948. 



IX 



Contents 

Preface xi 

Foreword by Lucile Petry xiii 

1. The Foundation of Mental Health 1 

2. The Two-Year-Old 20 

3. Adjusting to Environment 31 

4. Intelligence 41 

5. Mental Deficiency 64 

6. The School Child 79 

7. Fears 92 

8. Causes of Behavior Problems 108 

9. Behavior Problems 119 

10. Preadolescence 147 

11. Adolescence 158 

12. Juvenile Delinquents 186 

13. Adults 199 

List of Visual Aids 225" 

Index 233 

A chapter summary is given on 
the fast page of each chapter. 



xi 



Foreword 

nr*HE PUBLICATION of such a book as "The Psychology 
of Growth" and its use by students of nursing con- 
stitute recognition of an important human relationship, 
that between nurse and patient. 

For the nurse it is essential that she have scientific and 
humane understanding of the patient so that her care will 
stimulate his continuing development to maximum 
capacity for living. She must understand what makes 
the patient into the person she finds. This understanding 
increases her usefulness as a member of the health team 
whose goal for the patient is preventive, therapeutic, or 
most commonly both. 

From other sources the student of nursing has learned 
that at birth the infant possesses a pattern for physical 
development. From this book she learns, in addition, 
that he possesses a pattern for the development of mental 
and emotional health. She learns the characteristics of 
an environment which educe optimum development of 
the individual. Two primary attributes of this environ- 
ment described at length by Dr. Beverly, are "security" 
and "standards appropriate to the age and characteristics 
of the individual." 

In the care of children, both as mother substitute and 
as mother adviser, the nurse has a rich opportunity to 
assure the provision of this security and the appropriate- 
ness of these standards. In the care of the adolescent or 

xiii 



Foreword 

adult she deepens her understanding of the patient's be- 
havior when she learns the extent of the security given 
him as a child and his reactions toward the standards held 
for him or developed by him. Her care of all patients is 
enhanced by her recognition of the two-way relationship 
between physiological reactions and intense emotions, 
rational or irrational. Knowing the psychological effect 
upon the individual of feelings of optimum security, of 
exaggerated dependence, or of rejection, the nurse comes 
to understand the degree of maturity of the patient. The 
concept of the "neurotic" a word sometimes improperly 
used by the nurse is brought into truer focus. She 
becomes less liable to errors in judgment and in handling 
of patients, and she will learn to ease the ''inevitable 
tension that lead to mental and emotional distortions." 
The role of anxiety and of illogical prejudices in the de- 
velopment of her patient's personality sometimes explains 
his behavior to her and enables her to give him more 
effective care. 

In addition, the student who uses this book will find 
fundamentals which will guide her in understanding her 
own behavior. She is given concepts worthy of thorough 
study as applicable to herself. The instructor who en- 
courages self-directed learning in her students will provide 
opportunity for free consideration and manipulation of 
these concepts by each member of the class. She will 
stimulate the student's search among the sources listed 
as references. 

Achieving insight into her own reactions will improve 
the nurse's relationships with her patients, their families, 

xiv 



Foreword 

her coworkers, and her friends. The development of an 
objective attitude toward behavior her own and that of 
others will make her a more effective agent for the pro- 
motion of positive health through caring for patients, 
through health education, and through assumption of 
effective citizenship activities. 

LUCILE PETRY. 



xv 



Chapter One 



The Foundation of Mental Health 

Lifers patterns are largely determined by ancestry. 
The vitality, temperament, and potentialities for growth 
are already present at birth and cannot be changed. Growth 
takes place according to a definite sequence. The baby 
acts in the way he feels and immediately begins to form 
habits of response to his environment. Given security and 
standards appropriate to his age and individual character- 
istics, he responds with optimum growth. The feeding 
schedule is determined by the rhythm of the individual baby. 
He is given as much food and affection as he wants. He 
takes responsibility for toilet habits when he is ready. 



THE infants now lying in their cribs will one day de- 
termine the course of civilization. They will inherit 
the reins of government, the control of industry, the power 
within the atom. What use they will make of this tremen- 
dous heritage, for good or evil, will depend, in large meas- 
ure, on the way in which we bring them up and help them 
to develop their latent abilities. 

We cannot go into the nurseries and say unequivocally 
that this infant is a potential Lincoln, that one an Edison, 
and the other a good average citizen. We can, however, 
assess certain physical, mental, and emotional traits that 

- 1 



A Psychology of Growth 

should guide us in our approach to each child and help us 
to care for him in a way that will bring out the best that is 
in him, insure mental health, and permit him to become a 
competent, well-adjusted, happy member of society. Con- 
versely, experience tells us that in twenty-five years many 
of the newborn babies who are now normal and healthy 
will be suffering from that mental ill-health which is a 
deterrent to individual success and a drain on social prog- 
ress. What can we do about this situation? 

It is obvious that during a child's infancy his parents 
(mothers directly and fathers indirectly) are the masters of 
his fate; but he never entirely throws off the yoke of their 
influence and for that reason it is essential that they be wise 
masters. In this incalculably important task they should 
be able to get valuable help from nurses and physicians, 
since these are the only professional groups that are in fre- 
quent consultation with parents during the children's most 
formative years. Because of the responsibility that thus 
rests on professional advisers, it is necessary for them to 
know what things are essential for mental health and how 
it can be preserved. 

At the outset, they will recognize that a baby's poten- 
tialities for development are born, not made. Fortunately, 
since nature is wiser and more consistent than parents, there 
is no physical or psychological alchemy by which anyone 
can change an infant's innate racial or individual character- 
istics. That is a natural law that man has recognized and 
accepted submissively in its application to every living thing 
except children. No farmer expects a pear tree to bear 
apples; no cattleman hopes that his herds will produce wool. 
For the same reason, no parent should plan to transform 

2 



The Foundation of Mental Health 

his stolid, down-to-earth child into a poet, or one who may 
be color blind into a painter. 

The agriculturist, to be sure, has this advantage over the 
parent: his sapling looks like a pear tree; his calves are 
unquestionably going to be cattle. To the parent most 
babies appear much alike. He cannot tell by looking at 
his newborn child whether he has on his hands a dancer 
or a mathematician, a singer or a scientist, or any one of a 
hundred beings that fathers and mothers want their children 
to be or to avoid becoming. Clues to this mystery are 
scattered through the family history, but for the complete 
solution the parent must wait and watch and permit the 
gradual unfolding of the child's personality. It is a fascinat- 
ing process and can be made to yield the most satisfying 
returns if the parent will be patient and will not expect his 
young pear tree to appear some day wearing apple blossoms. 

Just as the farmer knows that he cannot change nature, 
he realizes that the only way he can improve her handiwork 
is by collaborating with her. If he enriches the soil and 
provides water and protection from parasites, he may expect 
his tree to grow and flourish within the limits set by nature. 
He will not, however, demand that its sap should rise before 
spring or that it should bear fruit the first summer. Parents 
who are equally realistic will not try to force their child to 
walk before he is ready or to talk at the same age at which 
his brother talked or to play the violin because the next- 
door neighbor's child shows musical talent. They will 
recognize that their baby is what he is, that his pattern of 
development is predetermined, that they cannot change 
nature but, if they abet her by enriching the soil, by pro- 
viding nourishment and protection, they may help the child 

- 3 



A Psychology of Growth 

to achieve that sought-after miracle of growth and perfec- 
tion which can be obtained in no other way. 

Life, then, is a growth process beginning with a two-cell 
organism and continuing at least to senility. The greatest 
progress that has been made in the understanding of human 
behavior has resulted from observations of this process. 
Observations by pediatricians, educators, psychologists, and 
psychiatrists have contributed to our understanding of hu- 
man behavior and of the factors that promote mental health 
and of the causes of mental ill-health. One means of 
understanding all human behavior, therefore, is to seek it 
through a consideration of the phenomena of growth. 

It is possible to approach the subject through the study 
of one individual, taking into account only those things 
which pertain specifically to him, or from the standpoint 
that "every human being and his whole existence are a link 
in the long chain of historical evolution, a part of the eternal 
life stream. In this type of experience, existence is no 
longer defined by the personal past, instead the impersonal 
past creates for the individual experience a timeless back- 
ground, a perspective of 'eternity' and 'immortality'." 1 
From the latter point of view it appears that the infant, at 
birth, is not a new but a very old individual. In Aldrich's 
words, "each newborn is actually a living replica of the 
individual that came into the light of day long before the 
dawn of history." 2 His behavior reveals the unfolding of 
patterns developed by the countless generations of his fore- 
bears; he will pass them on to the generations to come. 

Before birth, growth proceeds at an enormously rapid 
rate. The two cells of the original organism separate and 
differentiate and, at the same time, synthesize and coordi- 

. 4 . 



The Foundation of Mental Health 

nate their functions. There is a division into cell groups, 
which multiply and form organs. Each group of differ- 
entiated and integrated organs forms a system and the 
various systems make up an individual as a whole. In the 
end, the two cells become six billion cells, each with meta- 
bolic processes and established behavior within itself and in 
relation to all the other cells of the body. There are, then, 
cells, organs, and finally an individual behaving according 
to a specific plan. In psychology, we are interested pri- 
marily in the central nervous system, but we must remember 
that each system influences all the others. A new field, 
psychosomatic medicine, has to do with the effect of the 
central nervous system on the other systems. Obviously, 
the other systems often affect the central nervous system. 

Growth takes place from within. We cannot add to a 
child's stature by grafting flesh on his bones, nor can we 
increase his mental capacity by trying to force knowledge 
into his head. The process is much simpler than that. We 
give him food and physical care and he responds with bodily 
growth; we give him affection and supply his intellectual 
needs and he responds with mental growth. If we with- 
hold this nourishment we may stunt his frame and distort 
his mind; otherwise, we cannot change his characteristics. 

Each individual is endowed with growth energy and is 
motivated by inherent drives. He has a lifetime storage 
battery that stimulates growth and the unfolding life pat- 
terns. This force, which may be called aggression or 
vitality, is normally constructive and capable of producing 
optimum growth. 

His rate of growth also is established and we can alter it 
only in an unfavorable way; that is, we may retard it, but 

5 



A Psychology of Growth 

we cannot appreciably hasten it. Growth takes place in an 
orderly manner, according to a specific pattern. Every 
muscle is formed by a regular process and in a precise 
sequence. Behavior traits grow like an automobile on an 
assembly line. Nature is the master designer; if we try 
to change her plans, the result is a faulty product; it is only 
by helping her to carry out her plans to perfection that we 
can be said to take the best possible care of the infant and 
the growing child. We can, however, supply the kind of 
care that he needs in order to attain the best possible health 
and develop his native, irrevocable powers to a maximum 
degree. This care begins at birth and its continuance dur- 
ing the child's first few years is extremely important, since 
infancy is the period when he forms the emotional patterns 
that will serve him throughout life. 

A baby is born with a mechanism for response to his 
environment. He reacts in terms of feeling; that is, he acts 
in the way he feels. Feelings are the conscious mani- 
festations of emotions, which, in turn, represent instincts or 
life energy, the basic drives motivating all life processes. 
Under certain conditions an individual feels frightened; 
under others, resentful. When his emotional needs are 
met, he feels satisfied and responds with confidence and 
complacence. 

Satisfaction of his specific needs also permits a child to 
achieve maximum growth. For bodily growth he requires 
adequate food and physical care; for mental growth he 
needs security and an opportunity to do things appropriate 
to his age and ability. Security is a feeling that is given 
to a child from birth by parents particularly by a mother 
who wanted him in the first place and now accept him as 

6 - 



The Foundation of Mental Health 

he is. It is a feeling of confidence and trust and all- 
rightness, which grows deeper and stronger and more sus- 
taining as parents manifest their willingness to permit him 
to develop in accordance with his individual pattern and 
with those standards which conform to his own capacity 
and level of growth. Coupled with these attitudes, the 
child must always have the satisfaction of doing those things 
of which he is capable without being retarded or pushed to 
reach some artificial standard or to fit some preconceived 
idea on the part of the parents. When these basic needs are 
fulfilled, the child can adjust himself to his environment, 
can develop the self-confidence that he needs to form habits 
of responsibility, and can grow up to be a reliant and reliable 
individual. 

All behavior is expressed in terms of habit. Thus the 
infant, from birth, forms the habit of responding to his 
environment with satisfaction and complacence on the one 
hand, and with fear and resentment on the other. The 
former pattern, if it becomes dominant, leads to mental 
health, the latter to mental ill-health. However, there 
are justifiable fears and resentments, emotional responses 
that represent the instinct of self-preservation and are 
therefore vital to the individual's existence. The child 
who reaches maximum growth, which means mental health, 
is able to experience the self-confidence that will allow him 
to meet situations in an intelligent manner. This goal is 
not always reached, but it should be our aim in rearing 
children. 

The infant is a selfish little animal, concerned only with 
his own growth needs. He is controlled by those primitive 
drives which are primarily concerned with self-propagation 

. 7 



A Psychology of Growth 

and self-preservation. At the same time, he is confronted 
by a complex and complicated society which, in his adult 
life, will demand the curbing and sublimation of a part of 
his impulses to conform to the high standards of civilization. 
This would create a critical situation if it were not that 
adaptability is one of the salient characteristics of the human 
organism. This adaptability, however, is part and parcel 
of the growth process; it is slow and continuous, and twenty 
or twenty-five years is a short period in which to achieve it. 
In early infancy, the child is passive in his demands, that 
is, when his needs are not supplied he cries; but as he learns 
to use his body, and as his intelligence grows and his emo- 
tions mature, he tries to gain satisfaction by more active 
efforts. Since he is growing and using his constantly 
increasing abilities, he becomes more aggressive in his 
attempts to satisfy his inner cravings, and in this he is 
successful, provided that his environment does not present 
too many obstacles. If too much is expected of him he 
becomes frightened and resentful and his aggressiveness may 
become partly destructive instead of being the constructive 
element that is necessary for success. Then, because his 
conscience causes him to feel a sense of guilt, his destructive- 
ness may be partially turned against himself and he will do 
things that harm rather than help him in his efforts. 
Menninger says, "If we can imagine a parent sufficiently 
skillful to replace each satisfaction of which the child is 
deprived by another satisfaction that the child could accept 
as approximately equivalent, without disloyalty to the 
requirements of reality, we should expect to see in the prog- 
eny of such a parent an ideal person, not one without 
aggression but one without a sense of being thwarted in the 
8 



The Foundation of Mental Health 

adventures of life, and without hate for anything except 
those things which should be hated and fought against in 
defense of his own ideals and best interests." 3 

At first thought, these fundamentals seem to be too 
simple; yet they are the principles'around which the human 
race has developed during the countless centuries it has been 
in existence. It is only since society has become more com- 
plex and the individual has therefore encountered greater 
difficulty in adjusting to its standards that parents have 
tried different methods of rearing children and that mental 
ill-health has increased. If we go back to the beginning of 
history, we find that self-preservation and the protection of 
the family were the sole business of the father; the mother 
cared for^the child, keeping him close in infancy, providing 
him with food, water, and warmth and permitting him to 
set his own pace for performing new acts and learning new 
skills. Even though society has undergone marked changes 
since our ancestors lived in caves and tents, babies have 
remained very much the same. We find that the young 
baby who was born yesterday is unhappy unless he is close 
to his mother for a considerable part of the time and receives 
the same care that the primitive woman bestowed on her 
child thousands of years ago. Changes in the rules for 
rearing children, therefore, reside in the details rather than 
in the fundamentals and are not necessitated by alterations 
in the human race but only by the increasing intricacy of 
civilization, which makes it necessary for us to use greater 
care in rearing children so that they can "take it." 

With these general statements in mind, let us now go into 
the hospital and observe a group of babies. Most of them 
are sleeping, but their sleep is not quiet or continuous. 

9 



A Psychology of Growth 

Their breathing is rapid, then slow and shallow. For a 
short time they lie still, apparently sleeping deeply; then 
they partly waken, tense their muscles, pull up their arms 
and legs, wince, and go back to sleep. These actions are 
performed by their bodies as a whole; there are no move- 
ments of individual muscle groups. Their crude move- 
ments are indexes of the immaturity of the babies. Their 
nervous systems are still in the process of development; their 
nerve pathways are not complete and the nerve sheaths are 
not fully formed. 

From time to time, different babies will cry. It may be 
because they are hungry, in pain, too warm or too cold, or 
wrapped too tightly. A sense of falling or a loud noise 
startles them and causes them to cry. A nurse picks up 
one of the wailing babies and in a moment or two he is 
quiet. Studies by Dr. C. Anderson Aldrich and his associ- 
ates 4 at the Mayo Clinic indicate that the amount of crying 
is inversely proportionate to the number of nurses on duty; 
when the babies are picked up more frequently, they cry 
less. They cry when they are separated from their mothers 
for too long a time. 

A baby is equipped at birth with several important re- 
flexes. As soon as he is born, he automatically begins to 
breathe. Nor does anyone have to teach him how to nurse. 
When his cheek is placed against the mother's breast, he 
reaches for the nipple and sucks. X-ray films have demon- 
strated that babies sometimes suck their thumbs or fingers 
before birth. The reflex response to pain is well known. 
In every normal baby the Moro, or startle, reflex is also 
present. It is produced by a loud noise or a sense of falling, 
which causes the infant to become rigid, thrust his arms 
forward in an arc, make clutching motions with his fingers, 

10 



The Foundation of Mental Health 

and utter a despairing cry. In the distant past this reflex 
was related to self-preservation and still expresses protest 
against minor insults. It is absent in cases of birth injury 
or irritation of the brain from other causes. 

These are elements that are common to all babies, but 
as we observe the occupants of the nursery one by one on the 
examining table we find certain marked differences, notably 
in size, build, and behavior. This one, who is diminutive 
in stature, has small parents and will probably follow the 
family pattern. The next infant is relatively tall and large- 
boned. He may become a big man, like his football- 
playing father. Scientific investigations of growth indicate 
that children are likely to follow these patterns, notwith- 
standing nutritional advantages or disadvantages. 

Similarly, we can ascertain some of the ^mental poten- 
tialities of these very young persons before us. The nurse 
tells us that this one tried to nurse, the day he was born. 
In so doing, he passed his first intelligence test and gives us 
reason to believe that he is normal mentally. By smiling 
before he leaves the hospital, or within the next few weeks, 
he strengthens our confidence in his intelligence. The next 
baby whom we examine causes us grave concern, because 
he is two or three days old and has not yet tried to suck. 
For that reason we must consider the possibility of a brain 
injury or lack of brain development. The intelligence or 
lack of intelligence of these two babies will continue through- 
out their lives. At this early stage of their development, we 
cannot say that some of the babies in the nursery are 
endowed with musical ability and that others will show 
mechanical aptitude; but even such characteristics may be 
tentatively deduced on the basis of family histories. 

Different degrees and types of emotional response also 

11 



A Psychology of Growth 

appear while we have these babies on the examining table. 
We can test their reactions by extending their legs and 
holding them firmly. One infant is not greatly concerned; 
one cries mildly when he is held too long; a third protests 
more vigorously, but stops as soon as he is released; while 
another becomes tense, cries violently and continues to wail 
after he is released. Each infant will behave in the same 
manner when his face is turned away from the mother's 
breast after he has been nursing only a few minutes. These 
responses to unpleasant situations are constant for each 
infant and may continue throughout life. (Sufficient ob- 
servations for proving this idea have not yet been made.) 
The last-mentioned infant, for example, will react violently 
whenever he is displeased. This reaction must be accepted; 
it cannot be changed. It may be designated as the tem- 
perament of the individual. 

Thus we see that each baby at birth has a well-developed 
and functioning mechanism by means of which he responds 
in terms of feeling to his environment. When his physical 
and emotional needs are satisfied, he is quiet; otherwise, he 
is restless and cries. 

Provided that we satisfy the baby's essential needs pre- 
viously described, we shall see his growth patterns slowly 
unfold and shall have the pleasure of observing how his 
abilities increase and adapt themselves to a more complex 
environment. But the parents are entitled to some specific 
information, in order that they may know what to expect of 
their child. They need to learn his characteristics and the 
program that they should follow. Because of the close 
relationship between physiological functions and emotional 
satisfactions, it is important to adjust feeding and other 

12 



The Foundation of Mental Health 

health schedules to the emotional needs of each individual 
infant. We should consider the child as a whole, so that 
both the physical and the mental aspects of his growth 
will receive attention. 

The emotional outlets of the baby are confined largely to 
feeding, fondling, elimination, and warmth. It is impor- 
tant, therefore, that these satisfactions, which have physical, 
physiological, and emotional aspects, should receive careful 
consideration, from both a physical and a mental stand- 
point. 

FEEDING 

In regard to feeding we should keep in mind a few im- 
portant facts. First of all, a baby is given more security 
from breast feeding than from any other source. It pro- 
vides an intimate relationship between the mother and the 
child and is reassuring to the infant, who at birth was sud- 
denly separated from the mother's being. If a mother is 
not able to nurse her baby, she should take him in bed with 
her and hold him in her arms while giving him the bottle. 
During the time that they are in the hospital, therefore, 
every baby on a bottle should be carried to his mother 
("banana wagons" are out) at each feeding time. At all 
ages, children should be offered food never be fed. From 
birth forward all well, normal children eat a sufficient 
amount of food to maintain health and promote growth. 
Only the child himself can determine the quantity of food 
he desires or needs. When the stomach is empty, painful 
contractions, together with sensations that come from body 
needs for food, stimulate hunger. When the stomach is 
filled with an amount of food that satisfies these physio- 

- 13 



A Psychology of Growth 

logical needs, hunger disappears. In addition to acquiring 
food, however, sucking provides an emotional satisfaction. 
That is the reason why all babies suck their thumbs and they 
should be allowed to do so. As their emotional needs are 
met in other ways, they give up thumb sucking with the 
bottle (at the age of from one to two years), returning to 
the habit only when they are tired or angry, and then only 
for short periods. * 

The feeding interval depends upon the baby himself. 
Each baby comes into the world with a fairly regular sleep- 
ing and waking schedule (rhythm) of his own. He usually 
sleeps about three, three and a half, or four hours at a time, 
or perhaps three hours for the daytime naps and four for 
those at night. From careful observations, Gesell 5 found 
that babies awaken less often during the night than during 
the day. At the end of each interval, the baby wakes up 
and cries. If he is fed, fondled, and made comfortable, he 
soon goes back to sleep. Especially during the first few 
weeks of life, it is important to adapt the feeding schedule 
to this individual waking rhythm, regardless of the irregu- 
larity of the program. Such a schedule is never regular, 
because the rhythm cannot conform to a time schedule and 
at A best can only approximate a three-, three-and-a-half-, or 
four-hour program. 

A four-hour baby (that is, one who eats at intervals rang- 
ing from three and a half to four and a half hours) who is 
permitted to determine his own feeding schedule will usually 
give up the night feeding during the first four or five weeks. 
In other words, he will not wake up, and the mother may 
omit the feeding. The three-hour infant will be likely to 
continue on his original schedule for several weeks. When 

14 



The Foundation of Mental Health 

the mother reports that he does not seem hungry, the doctor 
will know that he is probably ready for a four-hour schedule, 
and at six to ten months of age it will likely be discovered 
that the time has come for a three-meals-a-day schedule. 

Infants readily learn to take food from a teaspoon if it is 
offered to them before they are five months old. At six 
or seven months, when they like to put things in their 
mouths, they may be offered milk from a cup each day. 
If they are not hurried, they will learn to prefer the cup to 
the bottle and, in most cases, will give up the latter when 
they are between the ages of ten and twenty-four months. 
Most children from thirteen to fifteen months of age have a 
desire to feed themselves and can master the art in a few 
months. 

At fifteen months, then, we may find a child on a three- 
meal schedule, feeding himself (with, perhaps, a little help 
and an abundance of patience on the part of the adult in 
charge), and eating a sufficient amount of food for health 
and gain. He may have given up the bottle or will soon do 
so. He has developed these important health habits with- 
out restriction or force, but as a result of having had an 
original food schedule that conformed with his own rhythm 
and was adjusted from time to time as his growth needs 
changed. This fact may be considered as an illustration of 
progressive education. 

AFFECTION 

Parents want to know how much affection they should 
show their babies. This is an important question and 
deserves a specific answer. (1) We should emphasize the 
fact that security, of which affection is a part, should be 

15 . 



A Psychology of Growth 

given the baby continuously by the mother or by one 
mother substitute, that is, the infant should be cared for 
by the same person day after day, and not by one and then 
another. (2) The quality of the affection is more im- 
portant than the quantity. The best kind of affection is 
given by a mother who needs the baby as badly as he needs 
her. It is not given from a sense of duty and is not forced, 
as in the case of a mother who is unduly fatigued, but is 
bestowed spontaneously and without anxiety. (3) The 
amount of affection is inversely proportional to the age of 
the infant. During the first weeks of life the infant should 
be close to his mother, much more so than when he is older. 
In general, a child should receive as much loving attention 
as he wants, but should not be used as an emotional outlet 
by parents and other adults. Fondling, up to, but not 
beyond the point of fatigue at each feeding period, is usually 
sufficient. 

A comfortable rocking chair is an essential adjunct to the 
nursery. When that is supplied, the nurse or the mother 
can rock the baby during and after his feeding. He knows 
how much fondling he wants and will soon communicate 
his wishes to the person holding him so that she will know 
when he has had enough and is ready to go back to his bed. 
If she misinterprets the signals and the baby cries for more 
attention, she should hold him for a longer period. In 
order to make the baby feel secure, affection should be given 
largely by one individual, preferably his mother; he cannot 
be passed around for the pleasure of the friends and rela- 
tives. The mother need not be disturbed about the possi- 
bility of spoiling the baby by following this method. Spoil- 
ing is a different matter, which we will discuss later. 

16 



The Foundation of Mental Health 

TOILET TRAINING 

Toilet training should start as soon as the infant is ready 
for it. That time comes when he is old enough to under- 
stand the use of the toilet, generally at the age of twelve to 
fifteen months, if his emotional growth has reached the point 
where he enjoys this accomplishment and wishes to take on 
the responsibility for it. The mother or the nurse should 
then place him on a comfortable toilet (preferably, a small 
chair with a comfortable footrest) at the time of day when 
he usually has a bowel movement. She may massage his 
abdomen lightly. If she praises him for a new accomplish- 
ment and treats his failure with unconcern, he will soon get 
so much more satisfaction from using the toilet than from 
soiling his diaper, that he will take the responsibility for 
this habit. When he fails to do so, it is because he is not 
ready or the efforts to hurry him have been too great. ^U 

Most children train themselves for bowel movements dur- 
ing the day, at the age of twelve to eighteen months, and 
remain dry at twelve to eighteen months. They usually 
discontinue bed wetting when they are between eighteen 
and thirty-six months of age. It is important to remember 
that children accept these responsibilities when they are 
ready, when they want to, and not before. If the child is 
allowed to take responsibility (toilet training, for example) 
when he is ready (grown sufficiently), the function will not 
assume undue importance in his mind. If the training is 
started too early and too vigorously, it will assume pro- 
portionately greater importance in the individual's mind 
throughout life. 

17 



A Psychology of Growth 

RELATIONSHIP TO OTHERS 

During the first few months, an infant will not actively 
rebel when he is held by someone other than his mother, 
unless the situation is too strange and he is held awkwardly 
and uncomfortably. He will apparently accept mother 
substitutes contentedly if there are not too many. At about 
the age of six months, however, his mind is sufficiently 
developed so that he can distinguish between individuals. 
When this occurs, he nearly always cries at the approach of 
unfamiliar persons. He begins to show real anxiety when 
he is separated from his mother. This is well illustrated 
by his wails when he is taken to a physician's office for 
routine examination. The nurse and the physician can 
modify this behavior by the manner in which they handle 
the baby. Just as his protests will be violent if he is held 
in such a way that he cannot jnove, so they will decrease 
if he is permitted to sit on his mother's lap or if she or the 
nurse holds h'm during the examination. From these 
observations it becomes evident that the baby does not cry 
solely as a result of the inoculations he receives in the doctor's 
office, but also because of his natural feeling of insecurity 
when strangers approach, and especially if they take him 
from his mother. 

A mother, to be sure, cannot remain with her baby con- 
stantly, but when she is obliged to be away from him it is 
best to have her place taken by the same individual every 
time. The baby feels more^secure^when he is cared for by 
his mother and, in her absence, by the one substitute. It 
follows that parents who employ a nurse for their baby 
should be extremely careful to find one who has the cmo- 

18 



The Foundation of Mental Health 

tional attributes of a good mother, as already described, and 
should keep her throughout the child's infancy. Like- 
wise, when it is necessary to place the infant or small child 
in the hospital, he should have the same nurse during his 
entire stay and that nurse should be one who really wants 
to care for children and likes this particular patient. 

The resistance to outsiders reaches a maximum when the 
child is between the ages of eighteen and twenty-four 
months. After that it gradually decreases. At the time 
the child is thirty to thirty-six months of age, he should be 
ready to accept strangers and cooperate with them. If 
he does not give this cooperation, it is probable that there 
is something wrong with his program. 

REFERENCES 

1. DEUTSCH, HELENE, M.D., "The Psychology of Women, 5 ' 

Vol. II, p. 1, Grune and Stratton, 1945. 

2. ALDRICH, C. ANDERSON, M.D., Ancient Processes in a 

Scientific Age, American Journal of Diseases of Children, 
[vol. 64, pp. 7-14, October, 1942. 

3. MENNINGER, KARL A., "Love against Hate," Harcourt, 

Brace and Company, Inc., New York, 1942. 

4. ALDRICH, C. ANDERSON, M.D., CHICH SUNG, M.D., 

D.P.H., and CATHERINE KNOP, M.D., The Crying of 
Newly Born Babies, Journal of Pediatrics, vol. 26, p. 85, 
August, 1945. 

5. GESELL, ARNOLD, M. D.,"The Embryology of Behavior," 

p. 144, Harper & Brothers, New York, 1945. 



19 



Chapter -__._ Two 



The Two- Year-Old 

Growth patterns are fairly well established. The child 
now learns to speak in sentences, walks, plays; he is happy 
and has acquired the self-confidence that results from doing 
things. Retention of his normal mental qualities is most 
important in any disciplinary program. A child of this 
age cannot reason, in the adult sense. 



BY THE time that the baby has reached the age of two, 
he has passed his most rapid and important period of 
growth. Even though he evidences little desire to cooper- 
ate with strangers and other children and requires frequent 
praise from his nurses and parents, he has progressed far 
enough physically, intellectually, emotionally, and socially 
so that it is possible to determine his growth patterns and 
assess his potentialities and abilities more accurately. 
Physically, he has a well-defined structure; that is, he is 
tall or short, small-boned or large, well coordinated^ or 
clumsy, possessed of a sense of rhythm or devoid of it. He 
has learned to sit up, stand, toddle, walk, run, and climb 
stairs. Usually he speaks in sentences. According to the 
Gesell scale, the average child of this age can build a tower 
of six blocks, string beads with a needle, help dress and 
undress himself. He is able to distinguish black from white, 
but he does not discriminate between colors, even though 
he may know the color names. 
20 



The Two-Tear-Old 

All this behavior indicates that the child has gone through 
a long sequence of growth processes. In the matter of 
speech, for example, he started by making noises with his 
lips, mouth, nose, and throat. Later, some of these sounds 
began to take on meaning. At the age of three or four 
months, when he was able to recognize individuals, he 
evidenced happiness by laughing and cooing. As time went 
on, his laughing and cooing became more expressive. In 
course of further mental, physical, physiological, and emo- 
tional growth, he learned to use certain sounds to form 
words and thus, at the age of twelve months, said "mama" 
and named some objects. As his speech developed, he sup- 
pressed a large percentage of the sounds he had previously 
used and finally, at the age of two, put words together to 
form sentences. All his growth processes passed through 
analogous stages, which varied in accordance with his 
efforts and his innate capacities and were affected by the 
amount of security that he received and the opportunities 
that he was offered. 

This two-year-old, further, has developed much self- 
confidence and many habits of responsibility. He has, for 
instance, taken full responsibility for food habits, feeding 
himself, enjoying food, and always eating enough for health 
if he is offered a proper diet. His bowel habits and diurnal 
bladder control have been well established; he seldom has 
an accident, except under stress of some unusual or dis- 
turbing circumstance. Although he desires frequent ex- 
pressions of approval, he plays by himself for short periods. 
He has found that it is fun to make noise. His emotional 
expression is spontaneous and without control. He is self- 
centered, being absorbed in his own capabilities and sense of 
usefulness. 

21 



A Psychology of Growth 

At the age of two, the inborn temperament and individu- 
ality of each child is plain and unmistakable. It is very 
evident that one is alert, active, quick, and determined and 
offers more resistance than another, who is quiet, slow, and 
amenable to suggestion. One cries bitterly when disap- 
pointed; another is less sensitive. In other words, we see in 
action the same differences that we observed in the group 
of newborn babies on the examining table. These patterns 
are now more mature and unchangeable; they constitute 
the differences that create individuality. 

It is extremely important for parents and nurses to see 
that a two-year-old has fun doing things in order that he 
may acquire the confidence that is essential for further 
growth and self-reliance. Discipline and restriction also 
present pressing problems, since the two-year-old can walk 
and is impelled by unbounded curiosity. Everyone has his 
own ideas on the subject of discipline, and they are probably 
a reflection of his own childhood. The question is not so 
simple as it may appear to be, however, and is worthy of 
careful consideration. 

DISCIPLINE 

As in the case of all forms of growth, the best discipline 
comes from within and that kind is more helpful in later life 
than any compulsion imposed by another individual. On 
the contrary, exaggerated demands for obedience and im- 
possibly high standards of behavior may markedly impair 
a child's mental health. The problem of discipline usually 
begins to trouble parents about the time when their baby 
learns to walk and his curiosity and activity lead him to 
investigate everything in the house, including his parents' 

22 



The Two-T ear-Old 

treasures and such lethal weapons as matches, knives, and 
electric fans. The amount of restriction that can properly 
be placed upon a child depends not only on the nature of the 
coercion but also on given qualities, such as the degree of 
his vitality, the relative softness or hardness of his nature. 
Here again we must recognize the innate aggressiveness 
and degree of resistance that the child offers, especially to 
relatively unimportant situations. The final test of dis- 
cipline is whether it furthers or disturbs mental growth. 

Disciplinary problems caused parents of a twenty-six- 
month-old girl to take her to her doctor for examination and 
consultation. The child, who had been cared for accord- 
ing to the program previously described, was normal, 
healthy, and responsive; but now she posed a new question. 
The parents wanted to know how they could discipline her 
without cowing her. Watching as she ran around his 
office, the doctor saw that she was very active and full of 
healthy curiosity. While she investigated everything in 
sight, including objects that she could not have, she talked 
to herself about her discoveries and was obviously happy. 
Her long sentences indicated high intelligence. The parents 
reported that she was always lively and gay to a degree that 
had delighted them until recently, when she had broken 
two cigarette boxes, overturned a lamp, and pulled a cloth 
off the dining table, thereby shatttering some of her mother's 
choice glassware. 

Certainly she was not an easy creature to live with, but 
the qualities that motivated her actions were more important 
than the results. Her parents wisely recognized that, 
though they did not like to have their property destroyed, 
that was not so irreplaceable as the child's mental attri- 

23 



A Psychology of Growth 

bates, which they might injure permanently by too stringent 
efforts to safeguard the lamps and the tableware. What- 
ever its immediate consequence, her conduct showed that 
she was endowed with intelligence, alertness, curiosity, 
aggressiveness, and a happy disposition. They recognized 
that her aggressive destructiveness was accidental and not 
motivated by resentment or anger. In other words, it was 
not an aggressive destructiveness that should cause concern; 
rather, the child's accidents were those that go with aggres- 
sive constructiveness or trial-and-error learning. She was 
making some mistakes, but these were not too serious and 
she was learning from them. If she could retain her present 
qualities she would grow into the kind of woman that her 
parents wanted her to be. Recognition of this fact was 
more essential than devising methods of forcing too much 
obedience on the little girl, and the problem resolved itself 
into a matter of preserving her good traits and a state of 
mental health while preventing her from doing the very few 
things that might have serious consequence. 

There are various means of inducing individuals to act in 
a given way: (1) force or fear, (2) praise, (3) example, 
(4) interest, (5) habits of self-reliance. 

1 , Most children can be forced to do all manner of things, 
though some of them rebel violently from birth. These 
individuals develop serious behavior problems when parents 
set impossible standards. Anyone who uses force in govern- 
ing a child should know, that force is fear and that, whether 
it is exerted in the form of corporal punishment or of nag- 
ging, the results are the same. Since all behavior proceeds 
from habit, the child who is frightened too many times will 
habitually respond fearfully to every situation in life. Fear 

24 



The Two-Tear-Old 

and resentment also go hand in hand. In consequence, too 
frequent or too great use of force can only produce a fearful, 
resentful type of adult. Resentments, as we shall later see, 
lead to a sense of guilt as the child reaches maturity. Alto- 
gether, force, resentments, and a sense of guilt are the 
materials from which "nervous breakdowns" are made. 

2. Praise, on the other hand, is a safe and effective 
instrument safe because it docs not stimulate any harm- 
ful responses, effective because it satisfies a fundamental 
human craving. Every individual needs attention, and the 
younger he is the more he requires. Children constantly 
seek attention and cannot help doing so. Such behavior is 
as natural as sleeping or playing. However, there are two 
kinds of attention favorable, which is praise, and unfavor- 
able, which is criticism. A child who is not receiving suf- 
ficient favorable attention to indicate general approval and 
whose emotional needs are not being satisfied will resort to 
any action that will attract notice to himself, even though 
he knows it will provoke censure. That being the case, the 
wise parent will give his child attention in the form of praise, 
realizing that this will make it unnecessary for him to court 
unfavorable notice. This practice produces gratifying re- 
sults, because the child will do more for the sake of approval 
than for anything else in the world. There are different 
kinds of restriction. If parents are angry and use a threaten- 
ing tone or slap a child, he becomes frightened and feels that 
his mother and father do not love him. If they use a gentle 
tone and have a kind demeanor, they can convince the 
youngster that he is a fine boy and that they are objecting 
only to certain things that they cannot allow him to do. 
Very often parents can substitute a permissible activity 

25 



A Psychology of Growth 

that the child enjoys for the one that they must prohibit. 
By praising him for the thing he is now doing well they can 
partly offset the child's anger as the result of being thwarted. 
It is strange that so many parents feel it is not wise to be kind 
to their children. 

3. A child learns by imitation, and his parents are the 
models that he follows most closely. If parents decide how 
they want their boys and girls to act when they are grown, 
behave in that manner themselves, and do not talk about 
it, they will have a good preview of their offspring's adults. 

4. Children, like adults, do what interests them. If we 
knew how to add interest to the things we want them to do, 
discipline would be a simple matter. The difficulty is that 
we know very little about making things interesting to the 
small child. Parents (and nurses and schoolteachers) have 
difficulty in placing themselves on the child's level of growth. 

5. In considering discipline we should never forget, 
furthermore, that we must regard all behavior in terms of 
habit and that habits of responsibility based on self-reliance 
are those which will be particularly valuable to the child 
when he is grown. In childhood he gets satisfaction from 
doing the things of which he is capable and for which he is 
loved. A feeling of usefulness gives him confidence in him- 
self and makes it possible for him to take on repsonsibilities. 
He will develop self-reliance, therefore, when he has adult 
approval and is permitted to do things up to the limit of his 
capacity. A two-year-old is pleased when he is allowed to 
assume full responsibility for food and toilet habits, for help 
in dressing himself, and for play; and he gladly accepts the 
new obligations. The resultant self-discipline is more valu- 
able than any force that could possibly be applied from the 
outside. 

26 - 



The Two-Tear-Old 

So much for general suggestions to the parents who 
wanted advice about their little daughter. Specifically 
there were a number of plans for them to follow. They 
might move breakable and dangerous objects out of her 
reach; they might move her out of the way of danger; and 
finally, they might, within certain limits, restrict her forc- 
ibly. Putting fragile and expensive ornaments on a high 
shelf for a time would eliminate breakage and solve one 
problem of discipline. The father suggested that a lock, 
which he could attach to the flour bin in ten minutes, might 
save untold trouble. The use of a playroom or a playpen 
would safeguard both youngster and house at times when 
the parents were unable to watch her, as long as she per- 
sisted in doing things that were genuinely destructive or 
hazardous. This would probably cause the young lady 
some displeasure but would do her no harm if the restrictions 
were not carried to excess. At other times, when the child 
did something that the parents could not tolerate, they 
might stop her forcibly if they were unable to distract her. 
A reasonable amount of restriction does a child no hp.rm if, 
in imposing it, the parent does not lose his temper. 

These suggestions conform very closely to the attitude 
that the Chinese have held for centuries. They keep their 
tempers when children become too troublesome, and punish 
them only by removing them from the presence of the adult 
members of the family. If a child's behavior is very ob- 
jectionable, his elders sagely say, "His wisdom has not 
opened yet." 

One question in the minds of most American parents is 
whether or not they should insist on prompt obedience. 
The answer is that they may have a right to expect some 
degree of it, provided that they are reasonable in their 

27 



A Psychology of Growth 

demands on their children. Since parents are often un- 
reasonable, however, and children seldom can carry out 
more than 10 per cent of the orders they receive, it is not 
safe to recommend exact and immediate compliance. 
Parents usually do not make demands in terms of the growth 
needs of their children, but in relationship to their own 
personality make-up and difficulties. They may take out 
on their children the resentments they developed in their 
own childhood and inflict their own anxieties on the young- 
sters, or they may be too tired and overworked to be reason- 
able with them. The attitudes of parents will be discussed 
in more detail later. Parents should not worry about dis- 
obedience in any but very serious matters. The important 
thing is to preserve the qualities that go to make up mental 
health, rather than to inflict fears and resentments in an 
effort to correct lapses, which are seldom of any consequence. 

We cannot leave the question of obedience obtained by 
force and fear without mention of the two classical examples 
of its use on a national scale. In totalitarian Germany and 
Japan, unquestioning obedience to authority was imposed 
on every citizen. Under such a system, the leader was the 
only individual with freedom of action and therefore the 
only one without resentment, conscious or unconscious. In 
the groups below him each individual exercised his authority 
and vented his resentment on the persons who, in turn, were 
under him. Finally, the head of the family became a strict 
disciplinarian in relation to his wife and children and took 
out on them his resentment toward all those who were 
above him in authority. 

Leaders of such countries know that the pent-up resent- 
ments of the mass will eventually be directed against them 

28 



The Two-Year-Old 

in the form of revolution, unless that emotion can be turned 
upon others, preferably "our enemies," real or imaginary. 
Thus persecution of minority groups and, finally, wars are 
essential to the continuation of the totalitarian form of 
government. The release of this intense resentment ac- 
counts for the extreme cruelty of the Germans and the Jap- 
anese in the Second World War. In Japan, where authority 
is a part of religion, these resentments generate a terrible sense 
of guilt, since they are, in the last analysis, directed against 
the emperor, whom the people have been taught to venerate 
as the head of the state and as a true god. This sense of 
guilt accounts for the frequency of suicide in the Japanese 
military forces. 

Parents often ask when or how they should "break" a 
child of thumb sucking, enureses, soiling, drinking from 
the bottle, or some other behavior that they do not like and 
which they believe has continued longer than necessary. 
By "breaking" they mply force. The answer is that a 
child should never be broken to or from anything. When 
these habits continue longer than they should, the probable 
reason is either that the child has not been able to grow 
sufficiently to take on the responsibility in question or that 
the parents are expecting their normal youngster to grow 
up too rapidly. If undesirable behavior continues beyond 
the period when it might reasonably be expected to change, 
one should try to determine why growing up has been too 
difficult for the child. When emotional needs are met and 
expectations are not too great, children take on responsi- 
bilities at the proper time. They do things when they are 
ready, that is, when they have reached the right level of 
growth. Incidentally, it is interesting to note that graduate 

29 - 



A Psychology of Growth 

nurses very often wish their children to take on responsi- 
bilities far beyond their age. This apparently reflects the 
type of training that student nurses receive in hospitals, 
where precision of procedure and good results are essential. 

It is not too much to expect that a child of two and a half, 
whose parents have adopted the proper procedure, should 
have taken full responsibility for toilet during the day, sleep 
and food habits, dressing, and playing alone for short periods 
of time; he should have learned that there are a few things 
he cannot do, and he should have accepted his responsi- 
bilities and his limitations without undue fears or resent- 
ments. In consequence, his mental health is almost 
assured. 

The parents who try to reason with a very young child are 
inevitably doomed to disappointment in their method and, 
what is more painful, in their child. It would seem to be 
highly desirable to appeal to the child's intelligence in an 
effort to make him understand what he should or should not 
do; but the child cannot reason. A three-year-old thinks in 
terms of simple associations; his observations are elementary 
and concrete, and he is quite incapable of understanding 
the processes of the adult mind. 

A final rule about discipline: "when you don't know what 
to do do nothing; then you will be right about 99 per cent 
of the time." 



30 



Chapter Three 

Adjusting to Environment 

All children are normally jealous; they resent the new 
baby. Play is important from an educational standpoint. 
In play children are normally aggressive, at times destruc- 
tive, and they always fight. They can nearly always settle 
their differences by themselves. Progressive nursery schools 
provide safe group play. Self-reliance and habits of 
cooperation are developed by free play. 



BROTHERS AND SISTERS 

THE advent of a new brother or sister is not, as adults 
hope, a source of joy to the other child, but more often 
an affliction and the cause of new behavior difficulties. 
The groundwork of trouble is laid even before the arrival 
of the baby, particularly if no one has told Johnny what to 
expect. For some time, perhaps, mother has had to rest 
when Johnny wanted her to play; there have been con- 
fusion and whisperings and unexplained changes in the 
household, which made him feel insecure. This insecurity 
approaches panic when mother suddenly goes away. The 
nurse or aunt or friend who takes her place tells Johnny 
that he has a baby brother, but Johnny doesn't care about 
a baby brother; he wants his mother and she is gone. Un- 
prepared for these unsettling events, apprehensive because 
of mother's absence, Johnny not unnaturally becomes very 
troublesome to the adult in charge of the household. 

. 31 - 



A Psychology of Growth 

Mother's return with a baby does little to improve the 
situation for Johnny. The baby is the new sun around 
which the household revolves and Johnny feels himself a 
very minor and neglected satellite. Johnny sees mother 
nursing and bathing and dressing the interloper and hold- 
ing him in her arms, where Johnny would like to be cuddled. 
She has less time for him than ever. In return for all that 
he has lost, Johnny has nothing but a brother, with whom 
he cannot play and on whose account he must be quiet and 
clean and obedient. Everybody asks him if he doesn't love 
the baby. Of course he doesn't. He resents his mother's 
attitude and hates the baby. 

This is not theory, but a conclusion based on evidence 
acquired through play therapy and talking to young chil- 
dren. Hatred is their normal reaction to a new baby. 
For a detailed description of play therapy that demonstrates 
normal jealousy, read "Studies in Sibling Rivalry," by 
David M. Levy, M.D. 1 Adults should face the fact with- 
out surprise or disapproval. They cannot persuade Johnny 
to love his brother, either because that is desirable or be- 
cause it is naughty not to do so; and such an attempt will 
lead only to a serious, lasting sense of guilt. It is far 
healthier to allow Johnny to express his resentment and to 
let him know that his feelings are not unnatural or wicked. 
If we recognize that jealousies are entirely normal and 
sympathize with Johnny, instead of blaming him, we can 
help him slowly to accept the readjustments in the family 
relationship and gain some security as the result of having a 
brother. With proper management we can restore his self- 
confidence and security by letting him feel the importance 
of being the older child and playing a more responsible role 

32 



Adjusting to Environment 

in the family group. Slowly he learns to love his brother, as 
well as hate him. This is a good time for him to learn that 
he can love and hate the same person at the same time and 
that he cannot help feeling the way he does. 

PLAY 

Somebody once described a genius as an individual who 
learned as an adult what he knew instinctively when he was 
a child. This idea deserves serious consideration. We 
might translate it into terms of child care by saying that the 
successful adult is one who has been allowed to grow natu- 
rally, retaining and developing the traits that were his at 
birth. Play is an important element in this process, because 
it is (1) a source of the infant's earliest groping motions, 
which later develop into motor coordination and mechani- 
cal skill; (2) a release for emotional energies and a fruitful 
field for the growing imagination. The greatest emotional 
satisfactions in life, which result largely from the fullest 
possible use of mind and body, are, therefore, rooted in 
play activities. This applies also to creative work, which 
stems from imagination, originality, and the trial-and-error 
methods that play develops. Thus play, if not the mother 
of invention, is at least a very close relative. 

Incidentally, play is not limited to children. It is a 
fundamental need that manifests itself throughout life. All 
work and no play makes John an incomplete man, as surely 
as it makes Jack a dull boy. Play is a valuable outlet for 
pent-up resentments or aggressive destructive behavior, 
which might otherwise be directed into undesirable conduct. 
No child and no adult can be good all the time; he would 
burst. 2 

33 



A Psychology of Growth 

In the unrestricted play of children we see a dramatiza- 
tion of their feelings and mental processes. 

At the age of one or two, they are equally likely to caress 
dolls and play with them gently or try to pull out their eyes 
and hair. Sometimes when babies are placed together, 
they slap, claw, and bite one another. This behavior may 
be interpreted as normal curiosity or as evidence of an 
aggressive, destructive pattern already developed in the 
infant by insecurity and frustration of growth and emanat- 
ing from the instinct of self-preservation, attack being the 
best defense. At any rate, babies of this age require some 
supervision. 

During the next few years, their propensity for knocking 
down block towers, bursting balloons, and breaking toys 
gives evidence of the satisfaction that children derive from 
destructiveness. Children like to play together and, al- 
though they often show affection for one another, a few 
minutes later one may take pleasure in hitting the other 
over the head with any available weapon. They nearly 
always may be allowed to settle their differences by them- 
selves. Because of these rapid changes, young children 
need intelligent and consistent management. Wrong 
methods of handling them can do much harm. In manag- 
ing children, (1) it is necessary to recognize that they are 
like this and that there is a reason for their behavior; 
(2) adults must understand that these expressions of re- 
sentment are neither good nor bad, but that they are simply 
natural and must be accepted. 

NURSERY SCHOOLS 

The child's fourth year is the period of very nearly per- 
petual motion. The three-year-old is still unable to con- 
34 



Adjusting to Environment 

centrate on any one thing for more than a few minutes, 
unless it is connected with other children or with some 
physical activity. He is constantly in need of energy out- 
lets. This, therefore, is the time when his requirements for 
mental growth can be provided by group play, such as a 
good nursery school affords. 

Not all nursery schools fall into this category, however. 
While many of them are very helpful to mental growth, 
there are others that are distinctly harmful. The school is 
helpful insofar as it provides a safe place in which children 
can engage in group play. It does harm when it attempts 
to impose impossible standards of behavior or makes a 
fetish of "good" habits. The former type of school brings 
together a group of small children, provides them with crude 
toys, and, for the most part, leaves them alone to play as 
they like, work out their own standards of conduct, and 
settle their own differences. The other'type of school goes to 
great pains to get children into the habit of hanging up their 
coats, putting their rubbers in a row, washing their hands, 
marching to the toilet, washing their hands again, eating 
everything that is put in front of them, taking naps without 
wiggling, behaving decorously, and exhibiting social graces 
entirely foreign to the minds of young children. Such train- 
ing is not only useless, but it actually blocks mental growth 
and makes normal development impossible. 

Because nurses are often called upon to help organize play 
groups, it is important for them to recognize these funda- 
mental differences. In so doing, they can use as a guide 
the practices previously recommended for the home. The 
child may safely be allowed to act on his own initiative and 
without unnecessary regulation. The school should pro- 
vide facilities and permit the child to use them as he sees 

35 



A Psychology of Growth 

fit. If he has play materials, he will readily invent uses 
for them. Given the companionship of children of his own 
age, he will soon learn how to get along with them. By 
the time he is old enough for nursery school, he should be 
entirely responsible for going to the toilet he has sense 
enough to know when he wants to urinate. Food should 
be placed in front of him and he should be permitted to eat 
or go without. Altogether, the nursery school should con- 
tinue the program of making the child feel secure and per- 
mitting him to act independently, up to the limit of his 
capacity. The four-year-old child is able to take full 
responsibility for food, sleep, dressing, and toilet habits; and 
he can play with other children for longer periods with very 
little adult supervision. 

The interests of boys and girls begin to diverge when they 
are five or six years old. All through these early years, we 
find constantly growing differences in the degree of mechani- 
cal skill and motor coordination reached by individual 
children; but just as these skills and coordinations develop 
in unvarying succession, so the children's interests also 
develop in sequence. In other words, all children do the 
same things in the same order, differing only in regard to 
the age at which they begin to do them. First, they play 
with small objects, piling them on top of each other; later 
they play with shovels; then they want to use a hammer, 
ride a tricycle, skate, dig tunnels, and build huts. They 
form clubs and secret societies, then fraternities, and finally 
women's clubs and rotary clubs. 

In their play, children form habits of responsibility and 
self-reliance and gain valuable experience in social relations. 
When they are allowed to play freely, they learn the im- 

36 . 



Adjusting to Environment 

portant lesson of give and take. Without any adult expla- 
nation or lecturing, they discover that it is important for 
them to share their tools and that is pleasant to divide the 
work on their various projects. They try different ways of 
doing things and invent new ways, learn to help and to 
accept help. Of course they fight, but they also learn how 
to settle their differences. Each one wants to hold the 
center of the stage and finds that he can have it only a part 
of the time. They have their accidents and often hurt 
themselves; but these experiences develop caution, which 
is a habit of being careful when doing dangerous things 
not bad compensation for a few bumps. 

Throughout their play period, children should be encour- 
aged to use imagination, to work out their own problems, 
and to learn by experience. Nurses and parents must be 
content to play the minor role of sympathetic bystander. 
They can do nothing more helpful than to express interest 
in whatever a child is doing, to praise him for every achieve- 
ment, and to restrain their own impulses to show the 
youngster how to make his mud pies and his snowballs or 
even to make them for him. While they may advance 
suggestions if a child asks for a little help, they should always 
make him feel that he is the one who is doing the job on 
hand. 

Just as children derive no benefit from the tasks that 
adults perform for them, so they find no particular satis- 
faction in playing with complicated mechanical toys that 
are run by pressing buttons. As a matter of fact, parents 
who spend large sums of money on such playthings are not 
gratifying their children and, by giving them predigested 
mechanics, are actually interfering with the development 

37 . 



A Psychology oj Growth 

of their natural resourcefulness, imagination, and creative 
ability. 

The best provisions for play are crude materials, such as 
blocks of varying size and shape, lumber, hammer and 
nails, pails and shovels. The best place for play is a large 
room or lot where children can be left alone. Naturally, 
we must guard them from serious injury in the house and 
keep them inside a fenced yard, if that is necessary to pre- 
vent them from running into danger outside; but within 
those limits we should give them complete freedom to work 
out their own ways of doing things and their own social 
rules and regulations. This culture may seem primitive 
in the eyes of an adult, but it serves the children's purposes 
very well. It is, indeed, far superior to an adult-created 
and imposed culture, where standards of behavior are 
always too high for children. 

In this program there is no room for the teaching of man- 
ners, truthfulness, honesty, orderliness, or consideration for 
others. Observers see that children naturally exhibit a 
certain amount of these graces, but as we shall find when 
we study intelligence growth, they are abstractions that 
children do not have the intelligence to understand or the 
emotional development to appreciate before they reach 
adolescence. 

Free play is valuable not only because it offers the oppor- 
tunity for development but also because it provides an 
essential release for the child's aggression and the resent- 
ments and anxieties that it produces. Resentment and 
anxiety are normal emotions. It is as unfair to condemn a 
child for having them as it would be to scold him for being 
hungry, as unhealthy to force him to repress them as it 

38 



Adjusting to Environment 

would be to refuse him food. Since play relieves these 
emotions, it should not be regulated by adult standards of 
propriety. Games that adults often deplore, such as cops 
and robbers and others in which children pretend to kill 
one another, should be encouraged and not suppressed by 
the organized play program of well-meaning but misguided 
leaders. Children should learn by experience that some- 
times they love people and sometimes they hate them; 
sometimes they are confident and sometimes they get 
frightened; but that no blame attaches to these emotions. 
If we are to teach them anything about their play activities, 
it should be that they cannot help feeling as they do, that 
it is right for them to express their feelings, and that adults 
understand and approve. 

Note that we have emphasized the importance of free 
play. This is not the same as unsupervised play. Although 
children should be allowed to choose their games and work 
out the details, there are times when restriction becomes 
necessary. Skilled supervision offers protection and help 
to that one child who sometimes is selected as a sacrifice to 
the pent-up resentments of the others in the group. Parents 
or some supervisor, furthermore, should know what children 
are playing. For example, homosexual practices, which 
cause great distress in later life, can start with childhood 
play. The supervisor who finds children engaged in sex 
experiments should not become perturbed, because such a 
reaction can create disturbances in the minds of the young- 
sters. An adult's anger may cause the suppression and 
repression of the children's normal curiosity and implant 
in their minds many fears about sex. 

Helping adults to arrive at this understanding and to 

39 



A Psychology of Growth 

view children with approval is another great task for the 
nurse and the physician. They must reassure parents and 
convince them that normal play and the free, natural ex- 
pression of emotion, even when they are distasteful to the 
adult, are vital to growth and mental health. The nurse 
and the physician must remind parents constantly that sup- 
pression of normal emotions, such as fear and jealousy and 
resentment, is one of the prime causes of mental ill-health 
in the adult. 

REFERENCES 

1. LEVY, DAVID M., M.D., Studies in Sibling Rivalry, 

Research Monograph 2, American Orthopsychiatric 
Association, p. 937. 

2. BRILL, A. A., "The Value of Motion Pictures in Educa- 

tion, with Special Reference to the Exceptional Child/* 
p. 216, Child Research Clinic of the Woods Schools, May, 
1940. 

3. BEVERLY, BERT L, "In Defense of Children," pp. 72- 

135, The John Day Company, New York, 1941. 



40 - 



Chapter ------------- Four 



Intelligence 

Intelligence, one aspect of the mind, is the capacity 
to think and to solve problems. Like other aspects of 
growth, intelligence develops according to definite sequence. 
Individuals with the same general intellectual capacity differ 
widely in individual intelligence characteristics. Intelli- 
gence tests, properly interpreted, are of great value. Spell- 
ing, reading, and writing difficulties are usually innate. 
Environment has a marked effect on intelligence growth, 
especially during infancy and young childhood. 



THAT aspect of growth which we call intelligence, that 
is, the capacity to think and to solve problems, is not 
one unit characteristic but comprises many elements, which 
we must consider separately. As in the case of other forms of 
growth, there are wide variations in the intellectual develop- 
ment of different children and little uniformity within a given 
individual. Nevertheless, studies of intellectual growth 
indicate that, like physical and emotional development, 
it follows certain specific patterns. Just as each muscle 
and each of the various systems of the body develops *in a 
known sequence, so manifestations of the intelligence appear 
in a regular order. 

One cannot leave this simple description of intelligence 
without pointing out that it is inaccurate and oversimpli- 

41 - 



A Psychology of Growth 

fied, useful only for descriptive and clinical purposes; in 
reality, there can be no consideration of any behavior except 
in terms of the individual as a whole. Because we are 
attempting to discuss one aspect of behavior, which cannot 
be studied except in relation to behavior as a whole, there 
is much difference of opinion as to what intelligence really 
is. One description is anatomical; that is, the influence on 
behavior of the cerebral cortex, and especially the frontal 
lobe. This is the part of the brain that has developed most 
in the evolutionary process the part that accounts in a 
large measure for the superiority of the human over other 
animals. From a clinical standpoint, we can consider 
intelligence in terms of tests, in the same way that we apply 
measurements to physical growth. 

In early infancy there is less obvious differentiation 
between mental and physical growth. At this age the tests 
for intellectual growth and indexes of it are largely physical 
signs. If the central nervous system develops normally, the 
general behavior of the infant proceeds according to a fixed 
schedule. The most detailed and accurate information 
about the mental-growth patterns of infants is the result 
of studies made by Dr. Arnold Gesell * and his coworkers 
at the Yale Clinic. In order to obtain a complete picture 
of growth patterns and to determine the intelligence level 
of infants, Gesell has described developmental sequences 
under four different headings: (1) motor growth, (2) adap- 
tive behavior, (3) language behavior, and (4) personal- 
social behavior. 

1 . In the category of motor growth he has checked gross 
body, control and fine motor coordination; posture, head 
balance, sitting, standing, creeping, walking, prehensory 

42 



Intelligence 

approach to an object, grasp and manipulation of the 
object. 

2. The adaptive-behavior division relates to finer sensori- 
motor adjustments to objects and situations; coordination of 
eyes and hands in reaching and manipulations; ability to 
utilize motor equipment appropriately in the solution of 
practical problems; capacity to make new adjustments in 
solving simple problems (that is, resourcefulness). 

3. Under language behavior are included all visible and 
audible forms of communication: facial expression, gestures, 
postural movements, vocalizations, words, phrases, and 
sentences. While the development of speech requires social 
situations, it also offers clues to the condition of the central 
nervous system. 

4. Under the heading of personal-social behavior Dr. 
Gesell deals with the child's reactions to his environment. 
Although they are affected by outside influences, they still 
indicate intrinsic development. Bladder and bowel con- 
trol, for example, are cultural requirements, but they de- 
pend upon neuro-motor maturity, as well as intelligence and 
emotional growth. The development of this central nerv- 
ous system governs the child's ability to cooperate in all 
phases of life. 

Many observations of large numbers of children have 
shown that these behavior patterns, which unfold in a 
definite sequence, are all indexes of intelligence growth. 
By means of such studies it has been possible to set up 
criteria for the average child; that is, we can say that at a 
given age he should have reached a certain level of growth. 
These criteria form the basis for intelligence tests. While 
accurate descriptions of intelligence growth in infants are 

43 



A Psychology of Growth 

fairly recent, accurate mental tests for older children were 
developed almost forty years ago. 

In 1908, Simon and Binet French physician and psy- 
chologist, respectively perceived the sequential growth pat- 
terns in children and began, in an empirical manner, to find 
a set of tests that could be used as a measure of intelligence. 
After giving a large number of tests in homes and schools to 
children who were considered average and normal, these 
investigators accepted as a criterion for each age group those 
questions or problems which a majority of the children of 
that age were able to pass. For example, they asked all 
children, "How old are you?" A large percentage say, 
70 per cent of the five-year-olds knew their ages, while 
30 per cent of the four-year-olds, and 90 per cent of the 
six-year-olds answered correctly. Therefore, since few of 
the four-year-olds, the majority of the five-year-olds and 
nearly all of the six-year-olds answered correctly, the investi- 
gators considered this question a test for children five years 
of age. In the same manner, six tests were devised for each 
year from three to eighteen. These tests that Simon and 
Binet worked out have been revised and improved several 
times, the latest revision having been made by Lewis 
Terman and Maud Merrill. 2 

Intelligence tests are given with the same accuracy that 
applies to blood chemistry. For example, the examiner 
secures the complete cooperation of the child, makes certain 
that he is comfortable in every way and that he is not 
frightened. He gives the tests and records the responses 
(graded as right and wrong) according to exacting, detailed 
instructions. When he uses the Stanford scale, the ex- 
aminer gives the set of tests for the lowest year in which the 

. 44 . 



Intelligence 

child passes all tests and continues to the year where all 
tests are fmiled. The following case illustrates the method. 
John's age is five years and four months. We find that 
he passes the following tests (right answers marked + and 
wrong answers ). 

YEAR 5 

+ 1 . Picture completion (completes drawing of man) 
+ 2. Paper folding (folds 6-by-6-inch paper in triangle) 
+ 3. Definitions 

+ What is a ball? 

+ What is a bat? 

+ What is a stove? 
+ 4. Copying a square 
+ 5. Memory for sentences 
+ 6. Counting of objects 

Since John passed all tests for Year 5, this is the basal year. 

TEAR 6 

+ 1. Vocabulary 

2. Copying a bead chain from memory 

+ 3. Mutilated pictures (recognition of what is gone from 

picture) 
+ 4. Number concepts (picks up three, nine, five, seven 

blocks from twelve. Score + if right three times) 

5. Pictorial likenesses and differences (picks out like 

figures from two cards) 

6. Maze tracing 

TEAR 7 

1 . Picture absurdities (what is foolish in pictures?) 

2. Similarities (wood and coal apple and peach ship 

and automobile iron and silver) 

45 - 



A Psychology of Growth 

+ 3. Copying a diamond 

+ 4. Comprehension (what is the thing to do in various 
situations?) 

5. Opposite analogies (brother is a boy sister is a ) 

6. Repeating five digits 

TEAR 8 
All answers were wrong. 

To obtain this boy's mental age we take his basal age, 
five years, and give him two months' additional credit for 
each test that he has completed correctly (since there are 
six tests for each year, he receives two months' credit for 
each test). Therefore, he receives six months in Year 6 
and four months in Year 7, making his mental age five years 
plus six months plus four months, or five years and ten 
months of age. 

The intelligence quotient (usually referred to as I.Q.) 
offers further valuable information. It is obtained by 
dividing the patient's mental age by his chronological age 
(real age). In this case the mental age is five years ten 
months, or seventy months, and the chronological age is 
five years four months, or sixty-four months. Seventy 
divided by sixty-four is 1.09. The patient's I.Q., there- 
fore, is 1.09, usually expressed as 109. That means that 
this boy is 0.09 more capable in general than the average 
child. 

Here, then, is a boy of high average intelligence. His 
mental growth will probably continue at the rate he has 
already established; and since the intelligence quotient is 
fairly constant in all persons, we can expect his I.Q. to 
remain about 109 throughout his life. This is not an 

46 



Intelligence 

invariable rule, however. It sometimes happens that, when 
a child is given a second psychometric examination (intelli- 
gence test) at a later date, he is found to have an I.Q. as 
much as twenty-five points higher than the original one. 
Probably this means that environmental difficulties and 
emotional disturbances that were not recognized at the 
time of the first examination interfered with the tests and 
caused the original rating to be incorrect. 

Children are classified according to their I.Q. on the 
basis of the following classification: 

0-30 Idiot 

30-50 Imbecile 

50-70 Feeble-minded moron 

70-80 Borderline feeble-minded 

80-90 Dull and backward 

90-110 Adequate average 
110-120 Superior 
120-140 Very superior 
140- Genius 

What does this signify in terms of formal education? 
For example, how high must a child's I.Q. be to enable 
him to finish high school and college? Authorities generally 
agree that a boy or a girl needs an I.Q. of about 104 to 
graduate from a first-class high school and one of 110 to 
profit by college training. 

Intelligence quotients for some eminent persons have 
been estimated as follows: 

John Stuart Mill 200 

Francis Galton 200 

Goethe 185 

Macaulay 180 

Voltaire 170 

J. Q. Adams 165 

Pope 160 

. 47 



A Psychology of Growth 

Tennyson 155 

Samuel Johnson 155 

Wordsworth 150 

Byron 150 

Lincoln 125 

George Washington 125 

U. S. Grant 110 

Copernicus 105 

Faraday 105 

This table indicates that persons with fairly low LQ/s 
have achieved great success. Clinical experience bears out 
this observation. Two capable psychologists who examined 
a boy when he was eight years old found that his I.Q. was 
97. He subsequently finished high school with a fairly 
good record and when he graduated from an engineering 
college he was near the top of his class. Another boy of 
twelve, who was doing mediocre schoolwork, was found to 
have an I.Q. of 104. Later he finished college and became 
very successful in business. These cases are cited to warn 
against placing too much reliance on the I.Q. It might 
be compared to a white blood count in the diagnosis of 
appendicitis. Although every physician wishes to know 
the count, he would never allow the result to influence 
his diagnosis greatly. 

Experience in testing during the past twenty-five years 
has caused experts to change their conclusions about the 
average limit of intelligence growth. Originally they placed 
average adult mental age at sixteen years, but present 
studies now indicate that fourteen years is more accurate. 
In other words, maximum intelligence growth in the average 
individual is about fourteen years (which is analogous to 
stating that the average adult is five feet, seven inches tall). 
Beyond this point intelligence capacity is increased by 

48 



Intelligence 

experience. For further information on tests for children, 
see "The Measurement of Intelligence, 55 by Lewis M. 
Terman, 4 and "Directions for Administering Forms L and 
M," by Lewis M. Terman and Maud A. Merrill. 6 

Long after the formulation of reliable intelligence tests 
for older children, we were still unable to learn the mental 
age of infants until, a few years ago, Gesell and his associates 
worked out their norms of development. Every nurse will 
be interested in these valuable tests and, since they should 
be read as a whole, the reader is referred to "Developmental 
Diagnosis, 53 by Arnold Gesell and Catherine Armatruda. 1 
Note especially pages 27 to 86. 

These developmental schedules are of value in determin- 
ing the developmental age of the infant and in demonstrat- 
ing the sequence of growth. For example, at four weeks 
the baby clenches a cube in his hand; at sixteen weeks he 
looks from the cube to his hand, arm active; at twenty- 
eight weeks he transfers the cube from one hand to the other; 
two cubes are matched at forty weeks; at twelve months he 
applies cube on cube without releasing them; at eighteen 
months he builds a tower of three, and at two years builds a 
tower of seven. At three years of age he builds a tower of 
ten cubes and imitates a bridge. These progressive achieve- 
ments give one measure of his increasing intellectual capac- 
ity, improved motor coordination, and emotional growth, 
as manifested in the pleasure he derives from doing things. 

In an analogous manner many other tests for infants have 
been devised and from them it is possible to compare a given 
child^with the progress of the average child of the same age. 

The chart below, prepared by Gesell, is useful for sum- 
marizing behavior. 

. 49 * 



A Psychology of Growth 



mELTMTNAKY BEHAVIOR INVENTORY 
A|* JLO *u*. Date VI 



Cue No. 00 



Zmt 


MOTOR 


ADA*TIYB 




LANGUAGE 


PERSONAL-SOCIAL 


4ta. 




Lack* head control 




BfcfmfaHMtaf 




ImpMMvefae* 




Stare* at surrounding* 


lone 




AiymmctrK in supine 




Drop, toy immediately 




Small throaty tound* 




Listens 'to sound 


I6wk. 




Head erect. *liht bobbing 




Incipient approach. rattl* 




Coot 




Spontaneoui social imile 


Symmetric lupin* posture* 




Regard* rattle in hand 




Laughs .loud 




Hand pl.y 


Uwk*. 
Jon* 




S.U. U.nm, forward 




R**ehe*Atra*ptoy 




Squeal* 




Feet to mouth 








Transfers toy 




M m sound (crying) 






40 wk* 

ZOM 




Sits well, creep* 




Combine* 2 toy* 




Dada-Mama 




Nursery tricks 


x 


Pull* to feet at rail 




Pick* pellet, thumb ft inde* 


V 


On* other word 


V 


Perdi self cracker 


Siwks 

'Zone 





Walks, one hand held 


f 


Cube into cup 





Two other words 


I/ 


Co-operate* in dressing 






r 


Tnes tower I cube* 





Respond* "Give it to me 






11 mo*. 
ZOM 





W.Iks. lone, toddlw 


~ 


Tower, two cubaa 




4-6 words 





Points & vocalizes w.ntt 








Six cube* into cup 








Cattt toys 


ZOM 




Walks well alone 




Tower J-4 cube* 




10 word* 




Toilet regulated day 




Seat* self small chair 




Imitate* a stroke 




Jar*o 




Carries hugs doll 


yr. 
Zone 




Run* 




Tow.r 6-7 cube* 




Join* 2-J word* 




Asks (or toilet day 




Up down stair* alone 




Imitate* circular scribble 




Names J-S pictures 




Puts doll to bed. etc. 


.lyr*. 

ZOM 




Ride* tricycle 




Imitate* house' of cubes 




Sentence* 




Feeds self well 




Stands 1 foot, momentarily 




Imitate* croa* 




Give* full name, tt* 




Putsonsoxunbu.lon, 



INSTRUCTIONS (I) Check the most advanced behaviors in n<k *rH a) ktlanar. <!) The check* will indicate an *pr<uiuf maturity ape lonr 

<) NO DIACNOSISCAN BE MADEON THERASISOF THIS INVENTORY. Grots deviation (rom actual a. or marked disparity between bchavu 

indicate* the need (or diagnostic behavior examination 

CHARACTERIZATION, (phyucal (actors, social factor*, posture, attention, rapport, emotion speech, etc) 



Since tests designed to measure general intelligence do 
not reveal individual mental characteristics, it is necessary 
to find others that provide more detailed information about 
.the child. Individuals who have the same I.Q. have not 
necessarily reached a uniform state of development in all 
particulars; indeed, they show a wide divergence both of 
growth and of innate capacity in different fields. In addi- 
tion to mental age, therefore, we speak of the height age, 
weight age, dental age, reading age, spelling age, arith- 
metic age, performance age (relating to motor coordina- 
tion, mechanical skill, etc.), and others. Research workers 
are now making a great effort to devise a means of obtaining 
a fairly complete cross section of an individual's develop- 
mental level, showing both his general capacity and his 
particular abilities or difficulties. In order to do this, it 

50 



Intelligence 

may be necessary to give at least twenty-five different tests. 

As a result of tests and observations, it is clear that a 
child's chronological age is hardly a gauge of his mental 
ability. It is manifestly unfair to assume that he should 
be able to cope with given problems merely because he is 
six or seven years of age. As far as intelligence is con- 
cerned, the eight-year-old may be five years old or ten years 
old. He may at once have the mathematical ability of an 
eleven-year-old, yet be able to read and spell no better 
than a six-year-old. He may be a musical genius or devoid 
of musical ability. He may have considerable manual 
dexterity or none at all. Until we are able to determine 
his aptitudes and deficiencies, we cannot have an adequate 
conception of his educational needs; and it is necessary to 
fulfill these needs if his mental growth is to continue un- 
impeded and if he is to get satisfaction out of the things that 
he does. 

Some children have superior intelligence as applied to all 
subjects with which they have to deal; some, of average 
intelligence, may have highly developed special abilities; 
others, with average or high intelligence, have certain 
intellectual handicaps of a more or less serious nature. 
Mathematics is closely correlated with general intelligence 
and many children who have a high I.Q. are in the genius 
group so far as mathematical ability is concerned. Master 
chess players and outstanding mathematicians, such as 
Isaac Newton, belong in this group. That does not mean, 
however, that all children who are poor in arithmetic are 
necessarily below the average in general intelligence. Not 
infrequently, they are rated superior. Conversely, it some- 
times happens that a child of average intelligence has read- 

51 



A Psychology of Growth 

ing and spelling ability far beyond expectations on the basis 
of his I.Q, Musical ability seems to be a special talent 
one that bears little relationship to intelligence. 

Many children have serious special handicaps, which are 
entirely disproportionate to their general ability. This is 
particularly true of individuals who have specific reading, 
writing, and spelling difficulties. These selective dis- 
abilities were recognized long ago, and poor reading, 
especially when associated with writing and spelling dif- 
ficulties, was ascribed to mental deficiency. In 1896, Dr. 
James Kerr, an English ophthalmologist, published a series 
of such cases. The condition has been described as a 
"specific disease entity" called* congenital word blindness. 
Because of its similarity to acquired word blindness, caused 
by injury or vascular accident, scientists have suggested 
that it may be due to a congenital defect in the development 
of the brain areas for registering visual word memories. 

Dr. Samuel T. Orton 6 made the most important con- 
tribution to the recognition of this disability in a relatively 
large number of children and to the realization of its serious 
consequences. He pointed out that many school children 
who were considered mentally deficient, because they were 
unable to learn to read, were not subnormal but were suf- 
fering from this word blindness. The condition, according 
to Dr. Orton, occurs more often in boys than in girls. 
Features that he found to be fairly common to this group 
of children were (1) difficulty in differentiating P and (), 
B and Z); (2) a tendency to confuse palindromic words, such 
as was and saw, not and ton, and to reverse paired letters and 
whole syllables; (3) very frequent confusion of diphthongs, 
such as ea and ae\ (4) facility for mirror writing and draw- 

52 



Intelligence 

ing, shown very early in life, and more than average ability 
to read from a mirror. Dr. Orton found no defect in 
auditory memory but a failure to relate the printed word 
to its concept. Some hitherto unrecognized factor prevents 
certain children from acquiring easy association between 
the visually presented word and its concept and limits their 
ability to express the concept in writing, thus causing poor 
penmanship and spelling. 

In explanation of this difficulty, Orton offered the theory 
that it was due to a lack of cerebral dominance, that is, a 
confusion of handedness. Right-handed individuals have 
specially developed areas in the left side of the brain (Broca's 
area) that have to do with the names of objects and particu- 
larly with visual word memory. Left-handed persons have 
similar areas in the right side of the brain. Individuals who 
experience this type of reading difficulty almost always 
present a history of left-handedncss in their immediate 
families; they themselves do some things with the right 
hand, some with the left hand; in other words, they suffer 
from a confusion of handedness. Most persons have an eye 
dominance; that is, they see primarily with one eye, while 
the other follows. Children with these reading difficulties 
commonly have the dominant eye on the side opposite that 
of their handedness. 

Corresponding difficulties arise in spelling. At the pre- 
school age a child learns the names of objects and acquires 
the ability to speak them. When he goes to school, a large 
part of his training consists of associating these spoken words 
(or auditory memories) with the printed symbols that repre- 
sent them; that is, the spoken word "man" with the com- 
bination of letters m-a-n. Soon after he has made this 

. 53 - 



A Psychology of Growth 

association (the spoken word with the printed symbol for 
it), he must reproduce the symbols by spelling and writing 
the words. The child who has a tendency toward mirror 
writing and who fails to build an easy association between 
the various sensory "engrams" (visual, auditory, kines- 
thetic) produces many reversals in reading and spelling. 
For example, he writes B for D, F for 7~, G and P for Q. He 
is unable to recall the order of certain letters and habitually 
transposes them in such combinations as ea and ae, ei and 
ie. He also confuses the position of syllables and may often 
reverse letters, writing tac for cat and tar for rat. The fol- 
lowing examples illustrate characteristic spelling difficulties 
of this order. 

At the age of six and a half, David had already begun to 
have serious difficulties in school. His parents told the 
physician whom they consulted that the boy was inattentive, 
uninterested in school, and that he liked only to play. His 
teacher reported that he showed off and annoyed his class- 
mates. He was well physically and had an I.Q. of 125. 
Upon further interrogation, the parents reported that 
David's development had been normal except for delayed 
speech (not uncommon in these cases), a habit of doing some 
things with one hand and some with the other, and a tend- 
ency to draw backward and upside down. They reported 
also that his grandfather was a "terrible speller." 

Work with David revealed that he could not read or write 
the simplest first-grade words, not even his own name. He 
boasted that he was a good fighter, which was not true since 
he had poor coordination. It was found that David's school 
employed the flash system of teaching reading; that is, the 
teacher showed the children printed words and they were 

- 54 



Intelligence 

expected to remember the names. Since most children are 
visualists, this method is usually more efficient than the 
former system of teaching the alphabet and the sounds of 
the letters before asking children to learn whfcle words. 
David, however, had poor visual memory and, although he 
saw the same word many times, he could not remember its 
name. The physician explained this situation to the mother 
and advised her to employ a tutor and to have him teach 
the boy according to the auditory and kinesthetic method. 
David's father refused to take this advice, insisting that the 
child was only lazy and spoiled and in need of discipline. 

Two and a half years later, the patient was examined 
again. He had remained in the first grade for two years 
and was now threatened with failing the second grade. His 
father thought he was stupid and announced that he would 
whip him if he failed again. The teacher had lost all 
patience with the child. He was showing off more than 
ever and had many fights with other children. At home, 
he teased his younger sister incessantly and was negativistic 
and disagreeable. He said that he hated school, where he 
was in the "dumb" class, and liked nothing but movies. 
The following words are samples of his spelling: girl, girld; 
the, thae; bad, dab; boy, dog; school, shoow. Analysis of this 
work showed that the boy was spelling by sound and 
guess. He was unable to read such words as "fence," 
"around," and "over." The word "the," he called "it"; 
"boy," "dog;" "on," "and." 

Both parents finally agreed to let David have the special 
type of tutoring that had been recommended at the time of 
the first examination, and four months later he was doing 
satisfactory work in the third grade. His reading was then 

- 55 



A Psychology of Growth 

average for the class; his spelling was poor, but improved. 
One could predict that he would be able to continue through 
school, even though he might be poor in spelling. The 
most marked improvement in David, however, lay in his 
mental attitude. His mother reported that he was a "dif- 
ferent boy." This metamorphosis was caused by the boy's 
understanding of the nature of his difficulty; his feeling of 
success in school, for the first time; and the changed attitude 
of his parents. 

In this connection, one should remember that, while the 
ability to spell correctly is helpful, lack of it is not a critical 
handicap in life. Spelling difficulties cause criticism in 
school and in training courses, but they should not be taken 
too seriously. 

Tom, an eleven-year-old, had experienced difficulty in 
reading ever since he had started going to school. His 
teachers complained that he did not work and spent most of 
his time looking out the window. In the first five years of 
his school life he was diagnosed as retarded, having arrested 
emotional development, lack of focus of his eyes, and hypo- 
thyroidism. The two latter diagnoses were contrary to the 
findings of a competent ophthalmologist and the results of a 
basal metabolism test. After two years of failure in school, 
he was placed in the "opportunity room," known to every- 
one except the teachers as the "dumb room." (Inciden- 
tally, such rooms, which are designed for children who are 
mentally deficient or for any reason unable to follow the 
regular school program, usually offer more custodial care 
than opportunity.) During these school years, Tom became 
a major behavior problem. He was large for his age and 
grew into a bully. He beat other children severely, broke 

56 



Intelligence 

windows, and made himself objectionable to everyone, 
including his parents. 

Examination showed that Tom was normal physically. 
His LQ, was 135 but he had a mixed handedness; his right 
hand and his left eye predominated. The parents reported 
that the boy's paternal grandfather was partly left-handed 
and was poor in spelling. The paternal grandmother wrote 
and spelled badly and did not like to read. Tom was very 
proficient in arithmetic. He liked shopwork and made 
many electrical devices by following pictures and diagrams. 
In reading, however, he did not know such words as "re- 
member," "envelope," and "regrettable." He also made 
many word substitutions, such as they for there, over for under, 
in for on, went for gone. He spelled carrot, caret; everyone, 
everone; bottom, bottoner; farther, Jorther; either, aether; tomorrow, 
tomoro; remember, rremenber. Here, again, is evidence of poor 
visual word memory and spelling by sound and guess. 

Although Tom became extremely cooperative and made 
every effort to develop his visual memory, his progress was 
very poor. However, with special tutoring that developed 
auditory and kinesthetic memory, he showed slow but con- 
tinuous improvement. After two years of this help, he was 
able to read sufficiently to keep up in his schoolwork and to 
spell well enough to express himself to understanding 
teachers. In his case, as in the previous one, the change in 
his general attitude constituted his outstanding improve- 
ment. After a few months' time he became a studious, 
cooperative child. 

It was Kenneth's schoolteacher who referred him to a 
physician for examination. At the age of eleven he was 
enrolled in his third school system. In the two previous 

57 . 



A Psychology of Growth 

ones he had been considered retarded. He was well 
physically and had an I.Q. of 99, but he could not learn to 
spell. When asked to write, from dictation, "four score 
and seven years ago our fathers brought forth on this 
continent . . . ," he produced the following: u for cree and 
care yers curtey or fcrythr beril orre on theis certhe." This 
boy's ability to do schoolwork increased three years in six 
months' time after the principal began to give him special 
help thirty minutes a day. 

It is extremely important to recognize these cases, not 
only because of the obvious difficulties to which they give 
rise, but also because they always culminate in emotional 
disturbances. In fact, they might be used to illustrate 
what happens when a child is thwarted. The child is con- 
vinced that he is stupid and is correct in assuming that he is 
not liked by his parents and schoolteachers. Since failure 
in school is a reflection on both parents and teachers, they 
are all eager to disclaim any responsibility for the condition, 
and the child is censured at home and in the classroom. 
When he is unable to do the schoolwork, he loses interest; 
because he feels stupid and bad, he shows off before the 
other children; because his classmates ridicule him and call 
him "dumb," he assumes the air of indifference or, more 
frequently, fights back and tries to get even with them. 
Though neurologists and psychologists have understood this 
condition for more than twenty years, most teachers do 
not recognize it. 

Patients who suffer from these disabilities are often 
referred to the school nurse, because teachers and parents 
have been educated to suspect visual difficulties when 
children cannot learn and because eye-muscle unbalance is 
often associated with the condition. If the nurse bears in 

58 - 



Intelligence 

mind the nature of word blindness, she will find that it is 
easily diagnosed from the family history and from the 
patient's writing and drawing. 

In the treatment of one of these cases, the first important 
step is to acquaint the parents, the teachers, and especially 
the child with the nature of the difficulty. It is necessary 
for the physician to reassure the patient by telling him that 
he is not a stupid but an intelligent child, although he was 
born with a special handicap. He should be told that, 
owing to this handicap, he may always be a poor speller, 
but that with proper training he can learn to spell well 
enough to get through school. When the teachers under- 
stand the source of the pupil's difficulty and he is given 
adequate help, his conduct and his classwork improve and 
he becomes a happy, cooperative child. 

There are other special defects, of which the most com- 
mon are poor motor coordination and lack of a sense of 
rhythm. Children who have the former handicap may not 
be able to write well and those who lack a sense of rhythm 
cannot learn music. 

Most schools are not equipped to give the special help 
needed by children with these various handicaps, especially 
in cases where the condition is severe. Such conditions, 
particularly those which relate to writing and spelling, have 
been treated by many methods. The methods that have 
been most successful were developed by Dr. Grace M. 
Fernald, who has described them in her book, "Remedial 
Techniques in Basic School Subjects." 7 

ADOPTION 

A discussion of intelligence, especially in the case of 
infants, would be incomplete without added emphasis on 

- 59 



A Psychology of Growth 

the effects of environment upon the rate of growth. This 
appears strikingly in orphanages, where there are so many 
babies that it is not possible to supply the growth needs of 
all. Not uncommonly, therefore, babies who appear back- 
ward while they are in these institutions and who fail to 
pass the intelligence tests for their ages experience rapid 
mental growth when placed in good homes and often show 
superior intelligence. 

This phenomenon is illustrated by the case of Peter, who 
was taken from a good orphanage at the age of eleven 
months. After he had been given careful tests and had been 
observed for several hours, it appeared that he probably 
had normal intelligence. Since the foster parents wanted 
a child whom they could expect to grow up to take a place 
in a family of intelligence and education, a six-month test 
in the home seemed advisable, During little Peter's first 
few months in his new home, he changed from a rather 
apathetic, expressionless, inactive baby to one who was alert, 
active, animated, and happy. At the age of four, intelli- 
gence tests showed that he had an I.Q. of 120, a high degree 
of intelligence, of which he had given no evidence while he 
was in the orphanage. Any pediatrician who sees many 
adopted babies frequently observes this acceleration of 
mental growth when children are removed from institutions 
to private homes. 

Observation of such cases, in addition to our knowledge of 
the importance of satisfying growth needs, leads to the con- 
clusion that babies should not be kept in orphanages longer 
than is absolutely necessary. Orphanage executives agree 
that it would be desirable to use such institutions only as 
clearing stations and to make the turnover as rapid as 
60 



Intelligent 

possible. Prospective parents of adopted children should 
take babies at a very early age, but only on a six-month or 
one-year trial basis. The reason for the latter rule is the 
possibility that parents who adopt a baby soon after its birth 
may later find that they have taken into their care a mentally 
retarded child. 

This discovery may have painful consequences, as in the 
case of baby Grace. She was adopted at the age of two 
weeks, with the understanding that her background was 
good and that her real parents were highly intelligent. 
When she was six and a half, however, her first-grade 
teacher reported that Grace was making no progress in 
school. Intelligence tests showed that she had a mental 
age of five years, an I.Q. of 76. Further investigation of 
the little girl's antecedents revealed that the assurances 
given to the prospective parents before her adoption had 
been based on mere opinion, rather than on accurate 
knowledge. Although the foster mother and father were 
able to give the child every opportunity for education, there 
was nothing that anyone could do to raise her I.Q. The 
parents, particularly the mother, could not accept a re- 
tarded child, and the adoption was a great misfortune for 
all concerned. 

When it is available, prospective parents are entitled to 
accurate information about a baby's intelligence and should 
know whether or not there is serious mental disease, such as 
epilepsy, in his background. On the other hand, the baby 
should be given only to parents who are able to supply his 
needs for normal growth and give him a chance to grow 
up in mental health. Determining the attitudes of prospec- 
tive parents requires the services of skilled investigators. 

61 



A Psychology of Growth 

Edith is an example of the bad results of an unhealthy 
parental attitude. At the age of eighteen, she was placed 
under the care of a physician because of her fear of vomit- 
ing, especially in public. "I am terrified of what people 
will think of me," she said. For several years she had ex- 
perienced increasing fear of public opinion, of failure to 
pass examinations, failure to be accepted by a good 
college sorority, and many other anxieties. She had an 
I.Q. of 125. 

Investigation of the girl's history revealed that she had 
been adopted at the age of two weeks. The parents were 
college graduates and both came from very good families. 
During the child's infancy, her schedule was extremely 
rigid. She was never held, was strictly disciplined, and 
became a very good, tense, apprehensive little girl. After 
several interviews, the mother admitted that she had never 
wanted the baby and had never "felt right" about her. 
It was the father who wanted the child. "He knew about 
her," the mother said, "and was crazy about her, and so, 
since I could never have a baby, I went along with him." 
The relationship between the mother's attitude and the 
child's mental health is readily apparent. Cases such as 
this indicate the need of careful studies of the infant and the 
prospective parents before adoption if we are to safeguard 
the child's mental health. 

REFERENCES 

1. GESELL, ARNOLD, M.D., and CATHERINE S. ARMATRUDA, 
M.D., "Developmental Diagnosis," Paul B. Hoeber, 
Inc. Medical Book Department of Harper & 
Brothers, New York. 
62 



Intelligence 

2. TERMAN, LEWIS M., and MAUD A. MERRILL, "Measur- 

ing Intelligence," Houghton Mifflin Company, Boston. 

3. Bakwin and Bakwin, "Psychologic Care during Infancy 

and Childhood," p. 77, D. Appleton-Century Com- 
pany, Inc., New York. 

4. TERMAN, LEWIS M., "The Measurement of Intelligence, 5 * 

Houghton Mifflin Company, Boston. 

5. TERMAN, LEWIS M., and MAUD A. MERRILL, "Directions 

for Administering Forms L and M," Houghton 
Mifflin Company, Boston. 

6. ORTON, SAMUEL T., "Reading and Writing and Speech 

Problems in Children," W. W. Norton & Company, 
Inc., New York, 1937. 

7. FERNALD, GRACE M., "Remedial Techniques in Basic 

School Subjects," McGraw-Hill Book Company, Inc., 
New York, 1943. 



Chapter ,-- Five 



Mental Deficiency 

Mentally deficient individuals present problems to their 
parents, schools, society, and themselves. These indi- 
viduals do not have the intellectual capacity to understand 
the rules and regulations of society. There are many 
causes for mental deficiency. For the mental health of the 
parents and family, an infant who is of very low mentality 
should be placed in an institution as soon as possible. 
Educable mentally deficient children can become happy, 
useful citizens if given adequate training. 



INTELLIGENCE is a matter of growth. At one extreme of 
mental growth we find the idiots, in whom there is 
practically no development of the mind; at the other ex- 
treme we find the geniuses, whose mental growth has pro- 
ceeded far beyond the average. Near the lower end of the 
scale we have mental deficiency, or amentia, a condition 
in which the mind has failed to reach complete or normal 
development. 

The psychologist differs from the biologist and the sociolo- 
gist in defining mental deficiency. In the psychological 
meaning of the term, a feeble-minded individual is one 
whose I.Q. is 70 or less. From the biologist's and the 
sociologist's point of view, Tredgold * defines amentia as 
"a state of incomplete mental development of such a kind 

64 



Mental Deficiency 

and degree that the individual is incapable of adapting 
himself to the normal development of his fellows in such a 
way as to maintain existence independently of supervision, 
control or external support." This statement, which is 
similar to the legal definition, implies that some individuals 
who have low I.Q/s may, nevertheless, be capable of sup- 
porting themselves and getting along without supervision or 
control. From the biological and the sociological stand- 
points, therefore, they may not be classed as mentally 
deficient. 

Psychologically, on the other hand, no individual can 
make a normal adjustment to society unless he is capable 
of understanding its important standards honesty, truth- 
fulness, justice, and the like. These are all abstractions. 
Intelligence tests show that abstract thinking does not begin 
to develop before. the mental age of twelve years, and the 
individual whose intelligence quotient is 70 or below never 
reaches that age level. One test for a twelve-year-old is 
the series of questions: What is charity; envy; justice; 
revenge; courage? These are everyday terms and yet, 
until children reach the mental age of twelve years, they 
do not know the meaning of them. What is justice, for 
example? We all know the meaning of this word and yet 
we probably could not agree on a definition, because it is a 
general term one that, in part, means the same thing to 
all of us and, in part, has a different meaning in each 
person's mind. To the mentally deficient individual, how- 
ever, these terms have no meaning. 

Another demonstration of intelligence growth and the 
inability of mentally deficient individuals to do abstract 
thinking can be made by showing a picture to children of 

65 



A Psychology oj Growth 

different ages. The two-year-old, when asked to point 
them out, can indicate the boat, the tree, and other ele- 
ments in a certain picture. The three-year-old can volun- 
tarily name these objects. The seven-year-old describes the 
picture in concrete terms, saying, "There is a boat in the 
water. There are men in the boat. There are trees on 
the shore." The normal twelve-year-old will probably 
say, however, "The boat must be going down the rapids, 
because the man and the woman look scared." This 
observation of an abstract concept indicates that the child 
has some insight into the situation depicted and can under- 
stand the possible consequences. The importance of the 
ability to do abstract thinking cannot be overemphasized. 
We do not expect it of normal children below the mental 
age.of twelve or of mentally deficient individuals who never 
reach this level of growth. 

Mental deficiency has been ascribed to many different 
causes: inheritance, encephalitis, anoxemia, poisons, brain 
hemorrhage, birth injury, vascular anomalies with result- 
ing thrombosis of the vessels, and lack of development 
usually called cerebral agenesis which is probably the 
most frequent. When cerebral agenesis occurs in the child 
of mentally deficient parents it can be easily explained as a 
congenital or familial condition due to poor stock or poor 
germ plasm. It is not so easy to account for the condition 
in that large group of mentally deficient children whose 
parents have normal or superior intelligence; but scientists 
have suggested that it might be due to the bringing together 
of certain latent strains in the germ plasm, or to some toxic 
effects on the germ plasm at the time of conception, or to 
encephalitis before or soon after birth. 

66 - 



Mental Deficiency 

Mental deficiency resulting from an insufficient oxygen 
supply for the fetal brain during labor has been the subject 
of much discussion during the past few years. Some 
medical men feel that the sedation of mothers during 
labor may cause this condition. During infancy, encepha- 
litis, especially of the vkus type, may cause sufficient 
destruction of the cortical or subcortical areas of the brain 
to result in feeble-mind edness. Although the same con- 
dition in older children hardly ever causes damage, one 
should give a guarded prognosis when an infant of fifteen 
months or younger develops encephalitis. 

Science is familiar with mental deficiency caused by 
rupture of the blood vessels and the brain tissue at birth. 
Since the blood vessels at the base of the brain or in the 
temporal region are the ones that are usually injured, caus- 
ing motor paralysis, the amount of damage to the intelli- 
gence varies. For reasons that are not fully understood, 
however, the rupture of a cerebral blood vessel in an infant 
or a young child usually causes mental deficiency. In these 
cases there are always localized neurological signs; either 
the patient has paralysis or paresis, which is localized to 
one side of the body, or, if there is damage to both sides of 
the brain, one side of the body shows greater weakness than 
the other. 

Not uncommonly, damage to the brain, resulting in 
mental deficiency, is caused by the rupture of a cerebral 
blood vessel between the sixth and thirty-sixth months of 
life. In these cases the child has a "stroke," or an apoplec- 
tic attack. The onset is acute and is marked by high fever 
and convulsions, which may last for several hours or days. 
Following this, a child who previously may have been 

67 - 



A Psychology of Growth 

altogether well and normal, will suffer from weakness, and 
then from paresis on one side of the body and a degree of 
mental deficiency that varies with the individual. In some 
cases, a child may have a second hemorrhage on the same 
or the other side of the brain. This condition was first 
described as polioencephalitis of Striimpfel. It is, however, 
neither a polio nor an encephalitis, but a brain hemorrhage 
that is due to a congenital weakness of the walls of the blood 
vessels in the brain. The same damage, with a similar 
clinical picture, can be caused by thrombosis of the cerebral 
blood vessesls. 

Mental xieficiency is not only a great handicap to the 
child, but also the source of a serious problem in the home. 
The mentally handicapped child requires special considera- 
tion there and also in the school and in society at large. 
As Wile 2 has pointed out, "the inferior child struggling 
against incapacity and overdemand is no more a victim 
than the superior child whose mental gears are not en- 
meshed in educational dynamics. Among these groups are 
found an abundance of nonconformists in behavior, retard- 
ates, truants, delinquents, and neurotics. 53 

From the point of view of the most normal parents, the 
discovery that they have a mentally deficient child is a 
serious blow. The factors contributing to their distress 
may vary in intensity with individual cases, but these 
usually include unconscious biological resentments against 
bearing an abnormal child, the resultant social stigma, fear 
for the future well-being of the youngster, and lack of pride 
in his present accomplishments or lack of hope for future 
achievements. In addition to these trials, many parents 

68 



Mental Deficiency 

are afflicted by others, which are even more distressing. 
One of these is the idea, which is deeply ingrained in many 
minds, that every misfortune in life is punishment for wrong- 
doing. Nurses and physicians should be aware of that 
possibility and should assure the parents who come to them 
with their problems that the child's deficiency is not due 
to anything that the mother or the father did or did not do, 
should or could have done. It can best be described as one 
of the misfortunes of life over which no one has any control. 
A mother whose child was an idiot (because of cerebral 
agenesis) was typical of those parents who blame themselves 
for their children's deficiencies. She suffered great distress 
because she had felt, even before a medical examination 
revealed the full truth, that something was wrong with the 
baby. That is a normal reaction; mothers generally suspect 
the truth before physicians inform them that their children 
are developing slowly. In this case, the mother was 
abnormally disturbed and had become depressed and 
mentally ill because she believed that her child's condition 
was due to the fact that she had been a "very bad girl. 35 
In her childhood her mother had caught her masturbating 
and had convinced her that she was very wicked. When 
she married, she had a great deal of trouble in making a 
sexual adjustment. In discussing her problem with a 
physician, she said that the first time she saw the baby she 
knew that something was wrong with him but that "out 
of dread" she waited four months before getting a medical 
opinion. She was convinced, she said, that this defective 
child was given to her as punishment for her bad habit. 
After the doctor's assurances had removed her sense of 

69 



A Psychology of Growth 



^ she was greatly improved and was able to face the 
tragedy of having a subnormal child. Later she gave birth 
to a normal baby. 

Because of the popular stigma attached to the words 
"idiot," "imbecile, 55 "feeble-minded, 55 "moron, 55 and "not 
bright, 55 they should not be used in discussing subnormal 
children with their parents. The terms "mentally handi- 
capped 55 and "slow growth 55 convey the same meaning and 
are less offensive to many people. Often after a physician 
has pointed out that a child is not doing the things that 
are normal for 'his age and has explained that he will never 
be able to do regular schoolwork, one of the parents will 
say "but he is bright. 55 The reply then should be that he 
is a fine, bright child, but that he will never be able to 
handle academic subjects and will have to learn to work 
with his hands. 

Mentally deficient children are not necessarily a loss to 
society or lifelong burdens to their families. Some of them 
are demonstrably educable, and authorities now recognize 
that they may find a niche in society and become useful 
citizens. 

This has not always been the case. As late as 1912, 
Fernald called feeble-mindedness "the synonym of human 
inefficiency and one of the greatest sources of human 
wretchedness and degradation; the social and economic 
burdens of uncomplicated feeble-mindedness are only too 
well known. The feeble-minded are a parasitic, predatory 
class, never capable of self-support or of managing their 
own affairs. The great majority ultimately become public 
charges in some form. They cause unutterable sorrow at 
home and are a menace and a danger to the community. 5 ' 

. 70 



Mental Deficiency 

This attitude echoed through much of the psychological, 
criminological, sociological, and educational literature of 
the early twentieth century. Experts held that a state 
institution was the logical guardian of feeble-minded 
individuals and advocated it as a means of relieving parents 
and society of their presence in the home and at large in 
the community. During the past quarter century, ideas 
concerning the management of these individuals have 
undergone a great change, until today authorities realize 
that the mentally handicapped can learn to do many 
kinds of work efficiently, and that the community not only 
can but should use them for constructive purposes. 

Fernald himself was one of the authorities who ushered 
in the new era, after he found that state institutions were 
not having good results with the mentally handicapped. 
When he made a follow-up study of all the individuals dis- 
charged into the community from the Massachusetts School 
for the Feeble-minded from 1890 to 1914, he found that 
35 per cent were complete failures, despite the fact that 
those who were allowed to go home were only the ones who 
appeared to be the most promising. Similar studies, made 
later by Matthews, Stroms, Folley, Brown and others, also 
showed that the training afforded by public institutions was 
not having encouraging results. Between 21 and 40 per 
cent of the feeble-minded discharged from state institutions 
were failures in society; that is, they became serious be- 
havjor problems or were completely dependent for support. 

Quantitatively, too, institutional care was insufficient. 
The mere number of mentally subnormal children has made 
it impossible for any state to care for them all. In one 
city alone, an investigator found 21,000 mentally handi- 

71 



A Psychology of Growth 

capped children. Strayer 3 arrived at that figure in 1932 
as the result of a survey of the Chicago public schools. The 
state of Illinois, according to careful estimates, probably has 
more than 200,000 children with varying deviation from 
the normal. Such figures, which are typical rather than 
unusual, indicate the reason why no state has been able to 
provide institutional care for even 10 per cent of this group. 
Furthermore, it is the higher grade of subnormal children, 
those who have seldom been considered institutional cases, 
who need the most specialized attention. This help has 
always been considered a community problem. 

One of the dangers that go hand in hand with mental 
retardation is the possibility of delinquency. This relation- 
ship has been demonstrated many times. A study made 
by Glueck of 1,000 male delinquents in the Boston Juvenile 
Court showed that 28.2 per cent were dull, 17.1 per cent 
were borderline cases, and 13.1 per cent were feeble- 
minded, making a total of 58.4 per cent who were mentally 
retarded. Thus Glueck found a much higher proportion 
of children of lower intelligence among delinquents than in 
the general population. In studies of male and female 
delinquents, Glueck found that 78.9 per cent were retarded 
two or more years below the school grades normal for their 
ages. Wile 2 quotes statistics showing that in New York, 
in 1932, 29 per cent of the delinquents were mentally 
retarded; in Boston, in 1937, 37.8 per cent; in Chicago, in 
1923, 58.6 per cent of the fourteen- to fifteen-year-old 
boys going through the boys 5 court were retarded two or 
more years. 

No figures are available to show the percentage of 
mentally retarded individuals in the group that is dependent 

72 



Mental Deficiency 

upon society for support (the relief load in normal times). 

The foregoing in no way proves that mental retardation, 
per se, is the direct cause of delinquency or dependency, but 
only that the subnormal individual, being particularly sub- 
ject to these ills, requires more than the average safeguards. 
Instead of receiving needed help, however, the majority 
of these children are made to meet obstacles unknown to 
the normal child. They are rejected children and, from 
early childhood, suffer from their parents' chagrin and dis- 
appointment. At school they are unable to keep up with 
their contemporaries and miss the satisfaction of accomplish- 
ment that is enjoyed by normal children. After repeated 
school failures, they are untrained for any kind of employ- 
ment. In this situation lie untold causes for personality 
difficulties, which might result in delinquency or depen- 
dency. 

While these problems may sometimes result from mental 
retardation, they are more often symptoms of social mal- 
adjustment that have emotional rather than intellectual 
causes. A study by Shimberg and Reichenberg 4 shows 
that mentally retarded individuals with good personality 
traits make a much better adjustment than those individuals 
who have poor personality traits. In this respect, the 
experience of the mentally handicapped parallels that of the 
normal individual; that is, adjustment in society depends 
more upon normal emotional growth and development than 
upon any other factors. Since the mentally handicapped 
encounter more serious obstacles than do normal children, 
their emotional problems are greater and there is more mal- 
adjustment among them. When we remove these obstacles, 
however, or oflfer kindly, intelligent help in surmounting 

73 



A Psychology of Growth 

them, the handicapped child should be able to grow into a 
happy, useful individual. 

A healthy individual may be described as one who is able 
to use his native resources in the most efficient manner and 
thereby enjoy the greatest accomplishments of which he is 
capable. This applies as much to the person who is 
retarded mentally as to the normal individual. Both can 
enjoy physical and mental health if their environment pro- 
vides them with the opportunity for reaching a maximum 
growth and development. In the case of the mentally 
deficient child, the determinants for mental health are not 
dissimilar to those for the normal individual. 

The first essential for mental health is security, and this 
begins in the home. Whatever the child's condition and 
however disappointed the parents may be, it is necessary 
for them to accept him as he is and to make him feel that he 
is loved and wanted. Lack of such security is one of the 
principal causes of mental ill-health for these handicapped 
children. To be sure, it is very difficult for parents to 
accept the mentally retarded child. Whether they feel 
that he will not be a credit to them or fear for his future 
welfare, they are likely to reject such a child and to react 
to him by overprotection at one time and at other times by 
overcorrection. Either they try to do everything for him 
and to shield him from the world, or they try to force him 
to behave like a normal child. Both courses are likely to 
lead to serious emotional disturbances. For the welfare of 
the child and of the family, therefore, it is necessary for 
parents to face the inescapable facts and to govern their 
actions accordingly. 

Parents, expecially mothers, know when their babies arc 

74 



Mental Deficiency 

not normal; they arc seldom fooled. It is best that their 
suspicions be confirmed by expert medical opinion as soon 
as possible, because the earlier they know the truth and 
the more help they get in accepting it the more security 
they can ultimately give their children. If an infant is 
hopelessly retarded, however, he should be placed in a 
public institution or under private care before the mother 
leaves the hospital. This is advisable as a means of pro- 
tecting the mental health of the parents and other members 
of the family. 

Security outside the home comes when the child is ac- 
cepted by the community and the school. Unfortunately, 
most teachers resent a pupil who is mentally handicapped 
and make every effort to be rid of him. This is particularly 
true in those systems where the teacher is held responsible 
for a child's failure to make good progress and knows that 
she is judged, not by the success that he achieves within his 
individual limitations, but by absolute, arbitrary standards 
of excellence. For this, among other reasons, handicapped 
children need special educational facilities. 

The second essential for mental health, which is a corol- 
lary to the first (security), is the opportunity for the child 
to grow up according to his own pattern. In order to 
meet this requirement, it is necessary for those who teach 
and care for the child to understand his growth patterns 
and to let their expectations be determined by his ability 
rather than by their hopes. They should help the child 
to get satisfaction from learning to do things up to the 
limit of his capacity, however great or small that may be. 
When adult expectations exceed a child's ability, he reacts 
by overcompliance on the one hand and overdefiance on the 

75 



A Psychology of Growth 

other. These reactions, based on insecurities and accom- 
panied by fear and resentment, lead to dependency or 
delinquency. 

For all these reasons it has become apparent that mentally 
handicapped children require specially trained teachers and 
special educational facilities. Authorities also recognize 
that the best training has resulted from state programs that 
provide special aid to cooperating local school systems. 
Some states, notably Massachusetts and New York, have 
had programs for many years. More recently, Penn- 
sylvania, Wisconsin, Ohio, Michigan, California, and finally 
Illinois, have begun to develop plans to meet the great need 
of the mentally handicapped. The different programs 
vary in detail, but they are based on the belief that retarded 
children attain the greatest mental health when they are 
kept in their homes or in suitable boarding homes and are 
trained in accordance with their individual capacities and 
scholastic needs. This system, of course, does not apply 
to children with extremely marked handicaps, intellectual, 
emotional, or both. For their training it is necessary to 
provide state institutions. 

In the case of other children, several types of education 
are now offered. Provided that the teachers give handi- 
capped children special consideration, many of them can 
continue in regular elementary school classes. Others, who 
have more marked handicaps, do better in special classes. 
When children belonging to either group reach the age at 
which vocational training is indicated, they receive the 
greatest advantages from special schools operating as part 
of the local school system. 

A state protectorship, set up with public funds, may offer 

76 



Mental Deficiency 

further aid to the mentally handicapped. This protector- 
ship, designed to provide such supervision, treatment, and 
training as each child may need, should function in coopera- 
tion with the parents, the community, and the local school 
system. It can be a means of relieving parents of much 
anxiety about the welfare of a handicapped child after they 
themselves are no longer able to supervise him and provide 
for him. 

Proper care will help a child to realize all his capabilities, 
whatever they may be. The mentally handicapped child 
will not go so far as his normal brother, but there is no good 
reason why his emotional growth should be stunted or why 
he should be prevented from making a good adjustment to 
society. Children who have security and are allowed to 
grow up according to their own patterns develop habits of 
self-reliance, which give them the confidence and courage 
to face problems and to solve them. Unconsciously they 
develop good work, play, and health habits by doing the 
things that they want to do, in a program adapted to their 
individual abilities and emotional needs. Each one accepts 
responsibility for his behavior up to the limit of his mental 
capacity. The one who does not have the intellectual 
capacity to do the abstract reasoning and complicated think- 
ing of normal individuals may still attain normal emotional 
growth and will usually accept adults' norms of right and 
wrong to a remarkable degree. 

Thus fortified by security in the family and in the com- 
munity, and by confidence in himself, the mentally handi- 
capped child is ready to take his place in society. If society 
accords him that place and permits him to feel that he is 
needed, he will be able to complete a process of emotional 

77 - 



A Psychology of Growth 

and social growth that transforms a once helpless and 
hopeless group into useful, productive citizens. It remains 
for labor and industry to accept these individuals and to 
give them the numerous types of jobs for which their home 
and school training have fitted them. Employment is a 
double-edged instrument which gives the individual self- 
respect and protects society from the delinquency and 
dependency of large numbers of people who might other- 
wise be public charges. 

Unfortunately, a happy ending is not possible in every 
case. There will be some children who cannot grow up 
successfully because of adverse home conditions. Some 
children will need supervision by public agencies or place- 
ment in boarding homes; others will develop signs of 
delinquency and may have to be placed in state institutions. 
It should be possible, however, for the large majority to 
have mental health and to lead useful, happy lives. 

REFERENCES 

1. TREDGOLD, A. F., "A Textbook of Mental Deficiency," 

p. 124, William Wood & Company, Baltimore, 1937. 

2. WILE, IRA S., Integration of the Child The Goal of an 

Educational Program, Mental Hygiene, Vol. 20, 1 939. 

3. STRAYER, FRANK, quoted by Frank Beals, American 

Association on Mental Deficiency Conference, 1939, 
Chicago. Edited by Edward T. Humphreys. 

4. SHIMBERG, MYRA, and WALLY REICHENBERG, "The 

Success and Failure of Subnormal Problem Children 
in the Community," Judge Baker Foundation, 
Boston, A. B. Mental Hygiene, vol. 17, 1833 (Quote 
Fernald, Walter). 
78 



Chapter ------------- Six 



The School Child 

The nurse is an important part of the school system. 
Proper health education is of great value as a part of 
education. Progressive educators teach children; other 
educators teach subject matter. Education is learning to 
get along with others, physical and mental well-being, 
development of special abilities and interests, and the right 
to realize one's ability and importance. During this 
period of growth, play continues to be important. War 
games, comics, magic, and motion pictures are valuable. 



THE nurse is becoming an accepted and important part 
of the school system. This has come about because of 
the increasing emphasis on preventive medicine in present 
health programs and because educators as well as physi- 
cians recognize that physical growth is closely associated 
with mental development. The nurse is the intermediary 
between the educator and the physician, besides being the 
teacher of good health practices to children. She is aided 
by the fact that children, even more than adults, are 
interested in themselves and curious about their own bodies. 
They can be taught about themselves and can be shown 
methods of improving their bodies without having their 
unalterable defects emphasized. This implies that the 
nurse can distinguish between the innate constitutional 

79 - 



A Psychology of Growth 

differences of normal children and physical defects that 
require medical attention. She should be able, with medi- 
cal aid, to distinguish between small stature and under- 
weight; anemia and light complexion; normal hyperactiv- 
ity and "nervousness"; defective vision and poor visual 
memory; diets in the home that are adequate, although they 
do not follow the narrow nutritional food lists, and those 
that mighjt cause malnutrition; as well as to recognize the 
signs of acute and chronic illness. 

Much harm has been done to children in the past by 
using well-intentioned devices to force them to eat more 
food than they wanted or needed, and to gain weight beyond 
their capacity; by suggesting that all children have their 
tonsils and, adenoids removed; and by giving advice con- 
trary to that of their personal physicians. As a result, 
children have been taught that they were ill when they were 
entirely well; their unchangeable handicaps have been 
impressed upon them and their feelings of inferiority, pro- 
duced by these physical handicaps, have been increased. 

Health education in the school is best developed not only 
through the efforts of the school nurse but also by means of 
the. health standards and examples set by the teachers and 
administrators. The daily program; the emotional tone 
of the classroom; the facilities for play, sanitation, and safety 
all can be based on special consideration of the physical 
characteristics of children. Pupils can receive valuable 
information about healthy living through the attitude of 
teachers and nurses toward the care of accidents, illness that 
occurs in school, precaution against and control of com- 
municable diseases, routine health examinations by the 
children's personal physicians, and planned instruction that 

- 80 



The School Child 

emphasizes simple physiology (knowledge about the body) 
and medical facts that they can observe for themselves. 

Children learn more, for example, and are more im- 
pressed by seeing what happens when white rats are fed on 
different diets than by listening to boring lectures about 
eating spinach, which they may hate, or cereal, which may 
be nauseating to them. Another medium for helpful 
health education is found in motion pictures that take up 
the subjects of food and physiology and present them in an 
attractive and interesting, as well as informative, manner. 
Further information may be found in "Health Education." 1 

PROGRESSIVE EDUCATION 

Since the nurse's work must be correlated with the school 
program, it is necessary for her to understand and apply the 
educational methods of the teachers. During the past 
twenty-five years, there has been much discussion about pro- 
gressive education, and the controversy continues. Pro- 
gressive education was introduced by those educators who 
rebelled against the older method and substituted educa- 
tion as a part of growth and development for a system that 
was devoted to forcing children to act like "ladies and 
gentlemen" and to memorize set facts so that they might 
regurgitate them on examination papers. 

The chief criticism of progressive education has come 
from persons who considered that this new approach meant 
that children should do exactly as they pleased in school and 
that, therefore, they would neglect those subjects in which 
they were not interested and thus fail to learn all that was 
necessary. Those who believe in progressive education feel 
that teachers can make schoolwork so interesting that, with- 

- 81 



A Psychology of Growth 

out adhering to a rigid schedule, they will command the 
respect of the children and stimulate their interest. 

In the progressive school, time is set aside each day for 
arithmetic or reading, for example, but no two children 
are required to do the same amount or quality of work. 
The rate of progress and the amount of help given by the 
teacher vary with the individual child. The pupil is 
praised for his accomplishments and, if he has difficulty, 
the teacher looks for the reason instead of criticizing him 
for his failure to come up to some set standard. The pro- 
gressive school determines what a child should learn and 
finds interesting ways of teaching him that material. 

The fundamental difference between the standard and 
the progressive educational system lies in the fact that the 
former teaches subject matter, the latter teaches children. 
Hughes Mearns, 2 Elizabeth Hubbard, 3 and others have 
demonstrated that, with few rules and regulations in the 
classroom, they could interest pupils and stimulate them to 
do things far beyond the previously estimated capabilities 
of children. Most schoolteachers, however, do not possess 
this ability and find it necessary to have definite study 
periods and assignments. This method can be followed 
successfully if the teacher observes and takes into account 
the growth and development of each individual child. It 
represents progress in education comparable to that which 
has taken place during the same period in medicine and 
other branches of science. 

The progressive school will be in harmony with the 
nurse's ideas, because its curriculum is built in accordance 
with recent data presented by medical science. Growth 
follows the same general principles during the school years 

82 



The School Child 

as In any other period and the progressive educator, no 
less than the nurse or the physician, knows that it is not 
uniform and that no two children are alike. In the past 
we had to accept the self-evident truth that six-year-old 
Johnny was three inches taller than Jimmy, who was the 
same age; but because no difference in mental stature was 
visible to the naked eye, we expected one of them to learn 
to read merely because the other had that ability. Assum- 
ing that there was a definite time when every child should 
read and write and learn decorum, the old-time teacher 
considered school a place where the same set of facts was 
forced into the minds of all children, and rigid adult stand- 
ards of behavior were imposed upon them, just as home was 
the place where the young were forced to eat and to obey 
orders with military promptness. According to present 
concepts, education is the process by which the individual 
develops his mental and physical usefulness while becom- 
ing acquainted with himself and the world, and gaining 
knowledge necessary to an understanding of both. Wash- 
burn 4 says that education is (1) learning to get along with 
others; (2) physical and emotional well-being; (3) the right 
to health and happiness; (4) the right to develop special 
abilities and interest, that is, the right to be different; (5) 
the right to realize one's own organic unity. 

In the school, as in the home, the child's greatest need is 
security. When he enters school, the teacher becomes a 
substitute parent; and, as Elizabeth Hubbard points out, 
she should make each youngster feel that she wants him 
and approves of him. Like the parents, she must accept 
each child as he is, recognizing the fact that he has certain 
individual, unalterable characteristics. Just as no expert 

83 - 



A Psychology of Growth 

would mistake Mary's fingerprints for Betty's, so the intelli- 
gent teacher will note differences in their physical charac- 
teristics, besides varying degrees of motor coordination and 
mechanical skill, and will base her expectations of per- 
formance upon their capacity rather than upon any arbi- 
trary standard. The same thing holds true in regard to 
individual differences in mental capacity and the intel- 
lectual attributes that determine each child's ability to 
handle the different school subjects. Emotional responses, 
which vary as widely as physical and mental characteristics, 
result from innate qualities and emotional patterns acquired 
in early childhood. 

The needs of the school child are the same as those of the 
infant, but the former does not require immediate satis- 
faction. Whereas the infant wants attention the instant he 
is hungry or cold or frightened, the school child is able to 
wait a short period for the fulfillment of his needs. The 
postponement does not lessen his satisfaction. This ability 
to derive satisfaction from delayed responses is a sign of 
mental growth. 

After the child has mastered the simple problems of build- 
ing with blocks, shoveling sand, and coloring pictures in his 
paint and crayon books, he finds that he has exhausted the 
pleasures to be found in these pursuits. It is no longer 
enough for him to play with simple toys and run up and 
down by himself; he looks for other activities and finds 
satisfaction in performing more complex and more difficult 
feats. He wants to go to school and he wants to leari;. It 
is fun to read and write and spell, to work with other chil- 
dren, to play more involved games, and to find a greater 
outlet for his individual abilities. The school, therefore, is 

84 



The School Child 

able to make his mental growth a continuous process by 
offering progressively complicated problems, which at once 
grow out of the pupil's past experience and arouse the 
curiosity that will lead to further intellectual exercise. 

Self-expression, which Washburn gives as a second basic 
need of every school child, has already been described. It 
is the child's performance of those acts that make him feel 
useful and give him satisfaction in his accomplishments. 
While he is expressing himself, and in the process of learning 
new skills, he is also establishing further habits of self- 
reliance. As applied to school, self-expression involves 
putting materials together in new ways and taking responsi- 
bility for assigned work. Every normal child will get up 
in the morning, dress, eat breakfast, and go to school on 
time if left to his own devices. Provided that the expecta- 
tions of the school are within his capacity, he will take full 
responsibility for his classroom work without any prodding 
by his parents. Indeed, his need for self-expression is a 
greater force than any parental cajolery and provides 
stronger motivation for study than do any exhortations. 

The child's third great need during the school period is 
social integration. This is best achieved by means of 
play, in course of which lessons are learned through actual 
experience in handling materials, dealing with contem- 
poraries, and making necessary adjustments. Organized 
play with limited supervision stimulates mental growth, 
adds to the child's independence, and helps to channel his 
interests along the lines of his individual aptitudes. If we 
are to preserve his mental health, we must let him play 
those games that conform to his emotional characteristics. 
Sometimes the games may seem cruel or uncivilized and 

85 - 



A Psychology of Growth 

altogether unfitting for little ladies and gentlemen, but 
suppressing the games does not eradicate the emotions that 
prompted them; permitting the games gives the child an 
opportunity to dissipate emotions that are not likely to be 
harmful except when they are kept locked up within himself. 

The war games, which are often the delight of the nine- 
year-old and the despair of conventional adults, are ex- 
tremely helpful to the participants. Such games do not 
manufacture animosities and blood thirsti ness; they are an 
outlet for the child's preexistent resentments, a dramatiza- 
tion of mental conflicts between good and bad, the child's 
normal wishes and the demands of society. 

It may allay some adult fears to mention an incident 
recently reported in The New Yorker. A mixed group of 
white and colored boys who were in the habit of playing 
together, proposed a new game, race riot. Plans for the 
game went well until the boys discovered that there were 
more whites than Negroes. This, they all agreed, was 
unfair; so some of the white boys offered to play that they 
were colored, thereby making the two sides equal in num- 
ber. That being arranged, the riot proceeded to its ami- 
cable conclusion. Of course, it should be remembered 
that the sense of fairness displayed by this group does not 
always hold. Young boys and girls commonly have too 
many resentments, born of feelings of inadequacy and lack 
of approval; they get satisfaction from picking out a single 
child or a minority group to torment. For this reason, 
playground supervisors are valuable. 

At about the time when children reach the second grade 
in school and continuing until puberty is reached, they go 
through what has been described as the "almighty" stage of 

86 



The School Child 

growth. They exude confidence in themselves and regard 
their own conclusions as supreme authority. Advice from 
grownups is unwanted and ignored. A boy becomes pri- 
marily interested in other boys and a girl, in other girls. 
Both are far more interested in the ideas of their comrades 
than in those of their parents or teachers. Any amenities 
that once they may have imitated now tend to disappear. 
If manners, cleanliness, honesty, or consideration for others 
meant anything to them in the past, they no longer do so. 
The conservative school, which emphasizes social graces on 
the report card, indicates a fundamental lack of under- 
standing of normal children. 

It is necessary to understand children's minds in order to 
answer many of the questions that puzzle and trouble their 
mentors. Among these are problems concerning comic 
books, motion picturers, and the radio, in relation to the six- 
to eleven-year-old schoolboy and schoolgirl. 

Many laymen and lay organizations have expressed great 
fear that comic books lead to anxieties, delinquencies, and 
confusion in children's minds. Fifty years ago, adults 
expressed that same concern about the assumed evil in- 
fluence of the popular dime novel. In the opinion of 
Bender and Lurie 6 comic books are comparable to the 
mythology, fairy tales, and puppet shows of past ages. As 
they have come down through the years, fairy tales have 
brought the same thrills to generation after generation of 
children (and none have been the worse for them). Jack 
and the Beanstalk, Cinderella, Alice in Wonderland, and 
now Superman are living literature, in that they express 
emotions that the human mind can readily understand. 

The comic book was developed for the preadolescent 

87 . 



A Psychology of Growth 

child. He has accepted it eagerly and used it as an emo- 
tional outlet. During the preadolescent period especially, 
the child feels his weakness, smallness, and other limitations, 
on the one hand; on the other, the revelation of his growth 
pattern (aggressiveness). Because his war games, his in- 
vestigations of haunted houses, his attempts to dig secret 
tunnels and to find buried treasure do not wholly satisfy 
him, he escapes into fancy. The omnipotence of Superman 
and other characters who possess immeasurable strength 
and resourcefulness, as well as magic wings and magic 
carpets for limitless flight, fulfill the wishes of boys and girls. 
Magic, radio, and death-dealing rays, with which comic- 
book heroes combat the forces of evil that confront them, 
offer a dramatic solution to the problems in the minds of 
preadolescents. One magazine on magic is reported to 
have a circulation of nearly one-half million copies a month. 

In comic books, bad people and destructive forces are 
forever opposing good people and constructive forces. In 
the child's mind, too, there is always a conflict between 
good and bad, right and wrong. When he attacks his 
own problems he becomes aggressive and ambitious and 
tries to build up his own importance, but at the same time 
he recognizes his weakness and his limitations and keenly 
feels the competition of others, which is the use of aggressive 
forces against him. The battle that rages in his mind 
develops in the child a sense of guilt and a feeling that he 
deserves punishment. The comic book dramatizes this 
personal battle and gives the child an emotional outlet; 
the invariable triumph of comic-book right over comic- 
book wrong brings him satisfaction. 

When millions of children will spend a dime or several 



The School Child 

dimes every week for comic books, it may be because these 
books supply something that these young people need badly. 
That something is a release for strong, baffling emotions. 
Those comic books which fulfill this need are greatly in 
demand; those which fail to do so go into the discard. 
From the point of view of the adult, therefore, they are a 
fairly accurate index to the problems in the child's mind. 

The boy or the girl who is disturbed by reading comic 
books is the insecure youngster who was already disturbed 
before he started to read. Prohibition of the books will not 
solve his difficulty any more than addiction to the books can 
be said to cause it. He should be allowed to read the stories 
if he cares to, but he should have sympathetic help from 
adults who try to understand his feelings. 

A mother who brought a bright but apprehensive nine- 
year-old boy to a physician because of nervousness ascribed 
his condition to "those terrible comic books," radio pro- 
grams, and motion pictures. Careful studies, on the other 
hand, indicated that Jimmy's difficulty was due to the 
parents' unreasonably high standards. If he had carried 
out their wishes, they would have eliminated much of his 
childhood. They wanted him to read "good literature," 
to get high grades in school, and to be a "little gentleman." 
Fortunately, Jimmy showed signs of "battle fatigue" and 
the parents, to their credit, realized that something was 
wrong and that the boy needed help. They were willing 
to change their program and, when they permitted the 
child to do things that they had previously forbidden (even 
to swear a little), his nervous signs disappeared. Ten years 
later, the mother proudly reported that her son enjoyed 
good books. 

89 



A Psychology oj Growth 

Like the comic book, the motion-picture play has caused 
'much alarm. Thoughtful adults are continually wondering 
whether children will become criminals as the result of see- 
ing gangster pictures or soldiers of fortune patterned after 
heroes of adventure plays. In answer to this question, we 
get an emphatic No from Dr. A. A. Brill, 4 an outstanding 
psychiatrist, who has made extensive studies of motion 
pictures and criminality. "In my psychiatric experience/ 5 
he says, "I have never seen a male or female who has com- 
mitted any crime because of something he or she has seen 
or read. It has often been said that there is such a rela- 
tionship but these statements are not true." According to 
Dr. Brill, children of eight to twelve years enjoy the motion 
pictures because they have strong, repressed emotions that 
are vicariously relieved by melodrama. For this reason, 
the motion picture is useful to the child, rather than 
harmful. 

In common with the comic book, the gangster motion 
picture portrays a battle between good and evil, and good 
always wins out. Actually the lessons that these motion 
pictures teach are more acceptable probably more valu- 
able and surely less harmful than the nagging that adults 
inflict on most children. 

The value of motion pictures was illustrated by the case of 
a ten-year-old girl who was very "nervous" that is, tense 
and afraid to go into a dark room and to go to bed alone. 
She was an insecure child, unprepared for preadolescence, 
and her nervous behavior followed sex play and the ex- 
perience of being scared by an older brother. One of the 
things that had made a great impression on the little girl 
was a motion picture in which a good man saved the life of 

90 - 



The School Child 

a bad man. The latter tried, in turn, to kill the good man, 
who was saved at the last minute, while the bad man 
was killed during the attempted crime. The girl enjoyed 
repeating this story and told it at least thirty times. Al- 
though she never gave the details twice in the same way, she 
invariably brought out the struggle between the good and 
bad men and the fact that the good man always won. Her 
repeated discussion of this motion picture became the basis 
for the physician's treatment of her difficulties and thus 
her rapid improvement was due at least in part to the 
motion picture. 

REFERENCES 

1. "Health Education," National Education Association 

of the United States, Washington, D. C. 

2. MEARNS, HUGHES, "Creative Power," Doubleday, Doran 

& Company, Inc., New York, 1928. 

3. HUBBARD, ELIZABETH, "Your Children at School," 

The John Day Company, New York. 

4. WASHBURNE, CARLETON, "A Living Philosophy of 

Education," The John Day Company, New York, 
1940. 

5. BENDER, LAURETTA, and REGINALD LURIE, The Effect 

of Comic Books on the Ideology of Children, The 
American Journal of Orthopsychiatry, vol. 11, pp. 540- 
554, July, 1941. 

6. BRILL, A. A., "The Value of the Motion Picture in 

Education, with Special Reference to the Exceptional 
Child," p. 16, Child Research Clinic of The Woods 
Schools, May, 1940. 

91 . 



Chapter -- Seven 



Fears 

Fear is a primary emotion, valuable or a handicap. Loud 
noises, sense of falling, insecurity, and lack of approval 
are the most common causes. Medical fears are common. 
Nurses can allay much of the fear of their patients. The 
seriousness of a situation (amount of fear in the child) 
depends upon the attitude of parents. It is also influenced 
by the condition of the child's mind at the time. 



FEAR is a primary emotion based on one of the strongest 
instinctive forces that motivate behavior, self-preserva- 
tion. Without fear, the individual would not long survive. 
It is, therefore, one of the most valuable attributes of the 
living organism. Nevertheless, the person who deals with 
children should always remember that excessive fears 
impede normal growth and development and make it 
extremely difficult for the individual to adjust to his 
environment. 

Evidence of fear is present from the moment of birth. 
The infant responds, by crying, to the insult of being cast 
into the world. The sense of falling and, as soon as the 
mucus is absorbed from the middle ear, loud noises will 
cause him to protest. In these reactions it is difficult to 
differentiate between fear and resentment. They are closely 
allied; but whether, as some psychologists believe, the in- 

92 



Fears 

dividual is first frightened and then angry, or the other 
way around, fear is certainly one of the baby's earliest 
reactions. 

Two other causes of fear in infancy and childhood are 
lack of security and uncertainty. The infant is distressed 
and shows signs of anxiety when he is separated too long 
from his mother. The period varies at different times of 
the day and in different infants from thirty minutes to 
several hours. As soon as the baby has grown intellec- 
tually to the point where he can recognize individuals as 
such and actively protest, he shows his fear by crying when 
strangers approach, becoming especially disturbed if they 
try to hold him. This reaction begins when the child is 
four to six months of age and, as he gains strength, increases 
in violence up to eighteen to twenty-four months. 

The dispersal of thousands of families as a result of war 
conditions amply proved the closeness of the relationship 
of the child to his parents, particularly to the mother. In 
fact, the effects of separation were so injurious to children 
that it seemed best to keep the younger ones with their 
mothers, even when there was danger of the most disastrous 
air raids. 

Since fears are readily communicable, babies often 
acquire them from contact with persons who are frightened. 
The mood of the baby also parallels that of the mother, 
with the result that anxious mothers have anxious babies. 
Such infants are usually more tense than others and, there- 
fore, are easily disturbed. 

Changes in routine, living conditions, and surroundings 
stimulate anxieties in infants and young children, as is 
illustrated by the following cases. 

93 



A Psychology of Growth 

A nine-month-old baby was happy and contented and 
slept well until her mother rearranged the furniture in the 
nursery. It was later discovered that the new arrangement 
placed the baby's bed in such a position that light shone 
on it and she could see reflections and shadows from the 
street. When her bed was returned to its original position, 
she again became a contented child. 

Fifteen-month-old John, who was taken to visit his grand- 
parents, accepted the new bed and strange surroundings so 
easily that on the first night of the visit he fell asleep at the 
usual time. -That night there was a electrical storm. 
Thunder and lightning had not previously disturbed the 
child, but now he was very badly frightened; he could not 
feel secure in new surroundings during a storm. There- 
after, for several years he awakened and cried when he 
heard thunder or other loud noises in the night. 

Worried grandparents sent for a physician because an 
eighteen-month-old grandchild, with whom they had been 
walking the floor, had not slept for twenty-four hours. She 
refused to eat, cried when put to bed, and expressed acute 
unhappiness. Even when she was held by her grand- 
parents, her pupils became very large and she showed all 
the physiological signs of fear. 

The baby's history revealed an emotionally disturbed 
mother and serious discord between the parents. The 
mother had precipitated the immediate trouble by suddenly 
going out of the city and leaving the baby with the grand- 
parents. They had not seen much of the child and their 
small, dark apartment contrasted most unfavorably with 
her own home. It seemed advisable, in those circum- 
stances, to place the baby in a hospital, assign very fine 

. 94 . 



Fears 

student nurses to care for her, and instruct them to sit down 
and hold her as often and as long as she wanted to be held. 
In spite of the strangeness of the hospital and the new con- 
ditions in which she found herself, the baby felt enough 
security and confidence in the nurses so that she slept, the 
first night. In two days she was entirely normal. 

Another little girl, twenty-six-month-old Alice, swallowed 
some medicine, which her mother thought was poisonous. 
The child was rushed to a hospital, where her stomach was 
washed and she was kept for a week, to make sure that no 
signs of poisoning would develop. During that week she 
saw her mother only two or three times and, on each occa- 
sion, little Alice cried violently. After she left the hospital, 
she was irritable, cried frequently, followed her mother 
around the house, refused to take a nap, and never fell 
asleep until late at night. Well-meaning friends suggested 
to the mother that the nurses had "spoiled" the little girl. 

To the physician it was obvious that the cause of the 
trouble was the child's anxiety. She had been seriously dis- 
turbed by her mother's terror when she discovered that 
Alice had taken the medicine. The experience of being 
rushed to the hospital and having her stomach pumped, 
followed by the week-long, almost uninterrupted separation 
from her mother, had been a very frightening ordeal for 
the child. This was explained to the mother and she was 
advised to hold the little girl on her lap and rock her as much 
as she wanted to be rocked. After a few days of this treat- 
ment, she began to show improvement and, within two or 
three weeks, she was practically normal again. For a long 
time, however, she was frightened unless her mother took 
her along whenever she left the house. 

95 



A Psychology of Growth 

The same kind of care brought favorable results in the 
case of another little girl. This two-and-a-half-y ear-old 
began wetting herself during the day, sucking her thumb, 
and crying a great deal, after her mother went away on a 
trip. Clearly, the sudden disappearance of the mother 
created anxieties in the child's mind. The nurse in whose 
care the mother had left the little girl was a reliable woman, 
but rather stern. Her strict discipline did nothing to dispel 
the anxiety that the child suffered as the result of her 
mother's sudden departure. Restored security, brought 
about as the result of more affectionate treatment by the 
nurse, and the mother's return caused the child's behavior 
to improve in a few days. In six weeks she seemed entirely 
well again. 

Similar cases come under the frequent observation of 
every nurse and physician. It is easy to make the mistake 
of attributing such behavior problems to overprotection 
and overindulgence. Careful analysis, however, reveals 
that the root of this particular evil is anxiety produced by 
some definite situation that has diminished the child's 
sense of security and confidence in his parents. 

Many other anxieties spring from a child's contact with 
persons outside the home, and not a few of these have a 
medical basis. Since a child develops an anxiety when his 
movements are restricted, it is necessary for the nurse to be 
careful not to hold him too tightly when the physician is 
making an examination. Furthermore, the young child is 
less frightened when the mother or the nurse holds him 
gently than when he is placed on an examining table. For 
that reason, the nurse should hold him in her arms when 

96 



Fears 

he is receiving an inoculation or any other treatment that 
disturbs him. 

In dealing with older children, we should take into 
account the ancient fears aroused by the thought of illness 
and death and the innumerable superstitions that, even 
today, are strong in the minds of many parents. An 
unfortunately large number of persons still hold the view, 
which was almost universally accepted a hundred years 
ago, that illness is retribution for some disobedience of the 
laws of nature or of parents. Every day, mothers and 
fathers use this concept to warn their children of the dire 
consequences of their acts or to assure them that their 
illnesses are punishment for their sins. When Ralph has 
a cold, his mother says: "It serves you right; you didn't 
mind me and wear your rubbers. If you weren't such a 
bad boy you wouldn't be sick," When Jean persists in 
running out into the garden, her father says, "If you don't 
listen to me and stay indoors you'll be sick and maybe 
have to go to the hospital." 

Children with heart trouble often say that they are ill 
because they ran about more than their parents wanted 
them to, and diabetic children explain that they became 
ill because they paid no attention when they were warned 
not to eat too much sugar. Disobedience of parental 
injunctions not to play too hard, get wet, chilled, or over- 
heated is believed by many children to be the reason for 
their illnesses. In other words, they are sick because they 
have been bad, and if they are very sick or have been very 
bad, they may die for their misdeeds. This belief in the 

relationship between disobedience and illness can easily 

. 97 . 



A Psychology of Growth 

become the source of anxiety in children and produce 
serious disturbances. 

In many cases, hospital experiences also lead to anxiety 
states, and not without cause. Threats of hospitalization, 
with which misguided parents sometimes try to govern sick 
children, make the hospital seem a terrible place. So also 
do the gruesome stories that children often overhear and the 
recitals of other children who have been hospitalized and 
who delight in exaggerating their most unpleasant experi- 
ences. The average child, therefore, is frightened by the 
mere concept of the hospital. Treatment in one often 
confirms his worst fears. The hospital, at best, is not the 
most pleasant institution. Operations and the care of the 
sick are its business; deaths do occur. The sights, sounds, 
and smells that greet the incoming patient are not reassur- 
ing. When a child finds himslf in this alien environment, 
separated from his parents, and feeling that he may never 
see them again, he naturally becomes terrified. 

The fear of never seeing parents again, which is particu- 
larly prevalent among charity patients, may have serious 
consequences, even after the child returns home. Such 
was the case with nine-and-a-half-year-old Louise, who, 
three weeks after she had been discharged from the hospital, 
began to have spells in which she would tremble, cry, and 
sometimes ask, "Where am I?" Inquiry into her hospital 
experience revealed that she had been placed in a con- 
tagious ward for treatment during an attack of scarlet fever. 
The strange room, the uniformed attendants, and the 
suspicion that she might never see her parents frightened 
her badly. When she cried, the nurses scolded and told 
her that if she did not behave they would lock her in a room 

. 98 



Fears 

by herself. After she had been assured that no one would 
hurt her, she was given serum intramuscularly. Later, she 
developed an ear infection. Again she was told that she 
would not be hurt and then both eardrums were punctured. 
She was very ill and spent some weeks in the hospital. 
Because the sight of her parents caused her to cry bitterly, 
they were told to look in on her only when she slept. This 
apparent desertion convinced her that she would never see 
her family again. 

The effects of such a terrifying experience persisted after 
the girl's recovery and discharge from the hospital. In the 
safety of her home, she would imagine that something was 
going to happen to her and would experience again the 
sensations that she had known when the doctors and nurses 
had examined and treated her in the hospital. The result 
was the recurrence of uncontrollable trembling and crying. 

This little girl was treated over a period of two and a half 
years, with the excellent cooperation of her parents, and 
results were fairly satisfactory. The parents and the physi- 
cian spent much time playing with the child and rebuilding 
her confidence in them and in nurses. They urged her to 
describe her hospital experiences and to talk about her fears 
and her hatred of those who attended her. She told 
repeatedly that her parents had often threatened to take her 
to the hospital and leave her there if she did not behave, 
and it was for this reason that she had thought she would 
never see them again. In time, she realized that, because 
of her fears, she had caused trouble and had given the nurses 
some justification for their sternness. Everyone admitted 
that the parents, physicians, and nurses had lied to her and, 

as in the case of all children, her own self-confidence was 

. 99 . 



A Psychology of Growth 

bolstered by the knowledge that not even these superior 
beings were always infallible and absolutely truthful. It 
reassured her to find that her elders did not betray her again 
and that, as she grew older and wiser, she could usually 
tell when they were "fooling" her. Later she had her 
tonsils removed without undue anxiety. 

Misunderstanding and uncertainty cause unnecessary and 
unsettling fears. An eight-year-old boy became disturbed 
after a circumcision because his mother had told him 
facetiously that they were going to "cut it off/ 5 and he 
believed that his penis had been amputated. A boy of 
eleven, who was somewhat backward mentally, became a 
serious behavior problem following an operation on his 
hand. Bandages covered the whole area and the child 
believed that the physician had amputated his hand. 

Since fear reactions are almost inevitable in the case of 
children who are removed from their parents and placed 
in strange institutions, which they do not understand and 
where they cannot feel comfortable, nurses and physicians, 
as well as parents, should give full consideration to the 
implications of hospitalization. Even a simple operation, 
such as the removal of tonsils and adenoids, may be the 
source of a painful emotional experience if there is not 
careful and intelligent management. 

Parents often make the serious mistake of telling the 
child many silly falsehoods about his coming operation and 
encouraging him to think of it as a kind of party, where he 
will meet other children, be highly entertained and offered 
ajl the ice cream and cake he can eat. When the time 
comes, he is dismayed to find that he must go to the hospital 
early in the morning without a bite of breakfast. At the 

100 



Fears 

door he encounters that peculiar medicinal odor common 
to hospitals. The usual entrance procedure is not reassur- 
ing, and when it is concluded, the child learns that he has 
to undress and go to bed. If he is a charity patient, his 
parents are told to leave. The nurse's statement that he 
will be all right and that mother and dad can come back 
later does not allay his mounting fear. The fact remains 
that he is alone in an unknown place, surrounded by strange 
people in unfamiliar white uniforms. He may even be so 
unfortunate as to be under the care of "professional" 
nurses and doctors, that is, those very strait-laced, unemo- 
tional, efficient women who, happily, are fast disappearing, 
and those equally aloof physicians who grunt rather than 
talk. (The distinguished psychiatrist, Dr. Frankwood E. 
Williams, 1 classified this behavior as infantilism.) At any 
rate, the small patient now realizes that he is not going to 
a party and that his parents have lied to him. Robbed 
of the security that had been based on confidence in his 
parents, and beset by all the uncertainties of an inexperi- 
enced and uninformed person in an unfamiliar situation, 
he is provided with innumerable fear stimuli. 

This, moreover, is only the beginning. Next the child is 
jabbed in the ear, to have his hemoglobin taken. After 
that he is wheeled to the operating room, where the people 
are dressed like ghosts and many shiny instruments are laid 
out for them to use. The doctors are intent on their prepa- 
rations, and unnecessary operating-room discipline prevents 
anyone else from speaking to the forlorn child. Now he is 
placed on an operating table and forcibly held down while 
he receives the anesthetic. However^carefully an anesthetic 
is administered, it produces a certain amount of asphyxi- 

101 



A Psychology of Growth 

ation; since it is sometimes given to children by inex- 
perienced assistants, the effect may be little short of strangu- 
lation. When the patient wakes up feeling sick, there is no 
mother to soothe him. No one pays attention to him except 
a strange nurse, whose attitude may be unduly stern. A 
child never undergoes this experience without feeling 
frightened. 

To be sure, some children must go to the hospital and, 
in course of their treatment, must suffer unavoidable pain. 
The amount of fear that these experiences stimulate, how- 
ever, can be reduced at least 75 per cent by intelligent 
management of the patient. First of all, parents, physi- 
cians, and nurses should never lie to a child about these pro- 
cedures or lead him to expect impossibilities. Before the 
day of the operation, the parents or the doctor should tell 
him that he is going to the hospital, should explain its 
purpose and nature, and should let the child know exactly 
what is going to happen to him. This can be done without 
exciting alarm. Then, when the child who knows what 
to expect finds everything to be just as described, he has 
confidence in his nurse and his physician and the comfort 
of knowing that he can believe them when they tell him 
that he is going to be all right. This child contrasts 
sharply with the one who has been deceived. The latter, 
after he has found pain where he has been promised pleas- 
ure, loses faith in everybody and, when he is told that all is 
well, he has no means of knowing that this statement is 
not an untruth like the other tales that preceded it. In- 
stead of having his initial fears allayed, he has acquired 
new ones. 
When children are uncertain, they can develop almost 

102 - 



Fears 

unbelievable ideas, which, in turn, aggravate their normal 
apprehensions. Eleven-year-old Jim presented a good 
example of this tendency. He was a boy of normal intelli- 
gence who went from a small town to a hospital in a large 
city for examination and beginning orthodontia. All 
through the trip he was negativistic and whert he reached 
the hospital he cried and refused to allow physicians to 
examine his mouth. His pupils were very large and he was 
unmistakably frightened. Asked what he was afraid of, 
he cried again and said, "What are you going to do to me?" 
The psychiatrist told him that he wanted only to talk to 
him, and began by asking the boy to tell what he thought 
was going to happen. After some urging, Jim explained 
that he thought the doctors were going to put a "draft" 
in his mouth. Since a draft, as he understood the term, 
was a current of air such as that caused by opening win- 
dows, he imagined that the physicians intended to put a 
hole in each lower mandible so that air could blow through 
his mouth. 

The origin of this idea was a conversation between Jim's 
parents and the family physician. The boy had overheard 
a discussion of his case in which someone used the word 
"graft." Jim had misunderstood and, from the supposed 
word "draft," had drawn his own appalling conclusions. 
After he had revealed this misunderstanding and the 
psychiatrist had carefully explained the prospective ortho- 
dontic procedure, Jim's fears disappeared and he became 
very cooperative. Thus in thirty minutes the boy was 
relieved of his anxiety and the physicians were saved much 
more than that amount of time in their examinations and 
initial treatment. 

103 



A Psychology oj Growth 

A child's psychological preparations for an operation 
and other hospital procedures, therefore, should be carried 
out with the same precision that is applied to surgical 
preparation. If the child has not been prepared by the 
parents or the physician, the nurses should take the responsi- 
bility for helping him to understand exactly what is going 
to happen and how it is going to be done. In addition to 
making this verbal explanation, it is helpful to take the child 
to the operating room the day before the operation, in order 
that he may see what it is like and be spared the painful 
fears of the unknown. If he is allowed to smell the gas, 
he will learn that, while it is not pleasing, neither is it 
distressing or to be feared. Another valuable and safe 
procedure is the administration of a sedative, such as 
nembutal, the night before and again thirty minutes prior 
to the operation. 

Children who are more than four or five years old accept 
operations without difficulty if they have confidence in their 
parents, nurses, and physicians. Such was the case with ten- 
year-old Jack, who had osteomyelitis of the femur. He was 
frightened and in pain. When his physician told him that 
he- had an infection like a boil in the bone of his leg, the 
patient asked, "What are you going to do to me? 33 The 
physician explained that they would take the boy to the 
operating room and give him something to smell that would 
make him go to sleep, after which he would not feel the 
opening of the leg. "O.K.," said the boy. 

A few days later, a focus developed in the other end of 
the femur and pain returned. The physician told Jack 
that the previous condition was present in another place, 

104 



Fears 

and again the patient asked, "What are you going to do 
to me?" 

"The same thing as before," the physician answered. 

"O.K.," said Jack, entirely willing to have another 
operation and showing no signs of undue anxiety. 

Of paramount importance also is the attitude of the 
nurses in charge. Their management of a child, or, for that 
matter, of any patient, can make all the difference between 
distress and peace of mind. The nurse becomes a sub- 
stitute mother and the extent to which she can make a child 
comfortable depends upon her ability to impart a sense of 
security, based on the comforting assurance that she likes 
him and that he can trust her. It is her first duty, then, to 
win the patient's confidence. She can accomplish this 
best, in the case of a child, by sitting down beside him for a 
few minutes, playing with him, showing him that she likes 
him and that he can expect to enjoy doing things with her. 
A nurse who does not like children or who does not like a 
particular child should be allowed to report those facts to 
the head nurse or to the nursing office and should not be 
required to take care of any youngsters or of the particular 
individual, as the case may be. 

It is essential, also, for nurses and physicians to remember 
at all times that patients are frightened and that unreason- 
ableness is a consequence of feeling ill and distraught. The 
nurse must take an objective attitude toward her patient's 
behavior and remarks and never, under any circumstances, 
construe them as a personal affront. She cannot hold this 
point of view, of course, unless she has confidence in herself. 

The effect of a potentially frightening experience is 

105 



A Psychology of Growth 

determined by the circumstances under which it occurs and 
the condition of the child's mind at that time. A loud 
noise, for example, or some chance remark that would not 
disturb the child at all if he heard it in the security of his 
home, may frighten him badly when he hears it in the 
hospital. He may develop a fear of the dark if he is placed 
in an unlighted room for punishment, although darkness 
would hold no terrors for him if it were not associated with 
the feeling that he is bad and that grownups do not like 
him. Fear of the toilet may develop when an anxious 
grandmother, for example, places the child there and com- 
municates her own concern. Another child may acquire 
an intense fear of water, as a result of being taken into the 
lake by a playmate in whom he has no confidence. In 
these and similar cases, it is insecurity preceding dis- 
agreeable experience and coupled with it that precipitates 
the new fears. In addition to the unhappiness that they 
cause, these anxieties based on insecurity make for per- 
sistent concern over sex matters, bowel problems, fear of the 
dark, fear of being alone, fear of illness, fear of fire engines, 
fear of animals and of many other things. 

Injudicious parents often build up additional positive 
fears by telling a child that they will go away and leave 
him or that they will call the policeman to deal with him 
or that his actions will have some dire consequences. 
Other parents produce similar results by telling a child that 
everything he does is bad and that he will be punished for 
his sins, by constantly pointing out the virtues and talents 
of another child and thus implying adverse criticism, and 
by expressing dissatisfaction when a little son or daughter 
is unable to do the things that are expected. 

106 



Fears 

REFERENCE 

1. WILLIAMS, FRANKWOOD E., "Adolescence Studies in 
Mental Hygiene, 55 Farrar & Rinehart, Inc., New 
York, 1930. 



107 - 



Chapter Eight 



Causes of Behavior Problems 

Parental attitudes are the most important cause of 
behavior problems. Some children are rejected by one or 
both parents. Parents commonly see dejects in their child's 
behavior, which represents a problem in their own minds. 
Hostility toward children may also be due to the inse- 
curity of the parents themselves, as well as to fatigue and 
financial problems. Parents wrongly humiliate their chil- 
dren in front of others. Another cause of misbehavior is 
insisting upon standards that are too high for the child. 



BEFORE taking up the more serious behavior problems 
of children it may be well to consider the environ- 
mental conditions that provoke them. "As the twig is bent 
the tree's inclined" is a truth long recognized and, in many 
cases, acted upon all too fully. Modern psychology has 
shown the dangers of bending the twig and the desirability 
of permitting it to grow according to nature's pattern. We 
have seen the child reach normal emotional growth and 
retain his mental health when he has not been bent to his 
parents' will but has been given security, standards of 
behavior in conformance with his abilities, and the right to 
assume those responsibilities that he is capable of handling. 
If these requirements are not fulfilled, the child tends to 
deviate from what is considered normal conduct and begins 
108 



Causes of Behavior Problems 

to exhibit behavior problems. The underlying cause may 
be an inherent defect that makes a good parent-child 
adjustment impossible or it may be lack of environmental 
advantages; but the results are the same. 

When a child who is driven by forces within himself in 
the form of growth energy attempts to gain satisfactions in 
life and is thwarted in his efforts, his behavior is likely to be 
the kind that is usually called abnormal. As Plant * has 
said, it is not a case of abnormal behavior in the child but 
normal behavior in an abnormal environment. Since 
parents' attitudes are the foremost environmental factors 
affecting children's behavior, it is well to look to them for 
the common conditions that interfere with normal growth. 

Babies are not universally guaranteed the rights of life, 
liberty, and the pursuit of happiness. Bernfield 2 has 
pointed out, as have others, that in primitive societies babies 
are not always guaranteed even the right to live. "We 
must realize," he writes, "that our present attitude toward 
the child, the present value we ascribe to life, is the result 
of long psychological development. Not all races and 
civilizations feel that birth guarantees a child the privilege of 
living, not all regard the death of the child as a disaster, or 
the killing of the child as a crime. The number of tribes 
who, on principle, kill a percentage of their children, a 
category (perhaps the first born) or a group (perhaps the 
weaklings), is very large and the motives very various." 

Bernfield goes on to say further that the protection of the 
infant in our civilization is due not to the absence of hostile 
feelings but to economic social pressure. Parents who do 
not want children and who are resentful toward them at 
birth are not uncommon. They seldom express these feel- 

109 



A Psychology of Growth 

ings, of course, except to a psychiatrist who is alert to the 
possibility of their presence and whom the parents trust 
because they know he will respect their confidences. This 
hostility is accompanied by a sense of guilt and usually the 
parent goes to extremes of superficial indulgence in an effort 
to compensate and to prevent the feelings from becoming 
apparent. Such a situation is frequently at the bottom of 
serious behavior problems and children's anxieties. 

Nurses and physicians often discover this hostility through 
the utterances of mothers during labor. "I hope this will 
be the last," a mother will say, or, "I'll never go through 
this again/' Other examples are such frequently heard 
remarks as, "What a woman has to go through !" "Having 
a baby is like laying an egg; now I can go on with my work 
[profession]," and "If it hadn't been for his father I wouldn't 
have all this mess." 

This hostile attitude toward children was clearly responsi- 
ble for the troubles of a nine-year-old girl who complained 
of headaches, was very restless and dissatisfied, and refused 
her mother's affection. She was the third pregnancy, the 
first two having been voluntarily terminated with abortions. 
In discussing her problems, the mother said, "When my 
husband and I were married I was determined not to have 
a child, but with the third pregnancy I decided to have a 
family." Later she added, "It is true that I never liked 
children and did not want them, but at last my husband 
and I decided to have a family. It was the thing to do." 
The result could easily have been foreseen: an insecure 
problem child. She now refused her mother's attempt to 
give her affection because she felt it was not genuine. 

Some mothers like children when they are babies and do 

110 



Causes of Behavior Problems 

not care for them as they grow older. This was true in 
the case of Brace's mother. At the age of five and a half he 
was given to much crying and expressed many fears, 
particularly in relation to his mother. He often asked if 
his grandmother's house was on fire, if his own house would 
burn down, if his mother had enough money, and if she 
was going out without him. He always wanted to help 
his mother and run errands for her in the house. A careful 
history revealed that the mother had nursed Bruce until he 
was nine months old and had given him much affection. 
His growth had been normal until a second child was born 
when Bruce was three years old. At that time, the little 
boy's behavior underwent a marked change. 

This was not a simple case of jealousy. When the mother 
was questioned further, she admitted that she was one of 
those women who like children only during their infancy 
and stop caring for them when they are big enough to run 
about. For that reason she had stopped giving affection 
to Bruce and lavished it all on the new baby. She did not 
realize that the little boy's fears and the so-called naughti- 
ness for which she had been punishing him were due to the 
change in her own attitude and his resultant insecurity. 

Another frequent expression of a mother's hostility is her 
refusal to nurse her baby. She usually tries to conceal her 
real reason for not wanting to nurse the child by saying that 
it will interfere with her social activities, or by making other 
excuses. One mother, who had plenty of breast milk, 
steadfastly refused to nurse her baby in spite of the argu- 
ments of her obstetrician and his rising anger. Pressed for 
her real reason, she finally explained that when she put the 
baby to her breast she hated him and felt sure that if she 

111 



A Psychology of Growth 

had to give him breast feedings she would always hate him. 
Since she refused psychiatric help in order to learn the 
underlying reason for her attitude, the baby was given arti- 
ficial food. This mother was an intelligent woman and 
tried very hard to give the baby good care; nevertheless, 
when the child was examined at the age of four, it was found 
that he cried a great deal, did not eat well, sucked his 
thumb much of the time, fought against going to bed, had 
night terrors, and still wet the bed. 

A student nurse evidenced the same attitude. During 
the course in psychology she voiced serious objections to 
breast feeding and said that she would not nurse her chil- 
dren. She brought up the question of breast feeding several 
times while the course was in progress and her attitude never 
changed. Some months later, when giving a baby a bottle 
in the hospital, she held the infant on her knees as far from 
her body as possible with his neck resting on her left wrist 
and the bottle held in the right hand, almost at arm's length. 
All during the feeding she was looking around the room, 
obviously bored with her job. It is not difficult to guess 
what kind of children she will rear. 

Many parents make up their minds in advance that they 
want a boy or a girl, a blond or a brunette. When their 
babies do not meet their specifications and they usually 
do not the parents are greatly disappointed and often find 
it difficult to accept the infant who is born to them. "Oh, 
it had to be a girl !" they say, and, "I don't want him; I 
want a little girl!" "I don't know anything about boys," 
a mother will say. "I can't bring one up." A father will 
exclaim, "Why did we have to have a little shrimp like 

112 ' 



Causes of Behavior Problems 

this?" Such attitudes are signposts that point to future 
behavior problems. 

Frequently resentments stem from some characteristic in 
the child that a father or a mother associates with a person 
whom he or she dislikes. This is particularly true when 
there is discord between the parents. More than one mother 
has said, "I would rather see my boy dead than have him 
grow up to be like his father." That is an honest expression 
of attitude toward a child who resembles the father, whom 
the mother hates. Nearly all parents observe that " Sonny" 
walks like his paternal grandfather or uses his hands the 
way Aunt Florence uses hers, or that "Sister's" posture is the 
counterpart of Cousin Ann's and her laugh might easily 
be mistaken for Cousin Carol's. It is most unfortunate 
when the parent dislikes the relative whom these manner- 
isms suggest, because in that case the resemblance stimu- 
lates resentments toward the child. 

Such was the difficulty in the case of nine-year-old 
George. His mother reported that he was unruly and 
inattentive in school, that he fought with children in the 
neighborhood and stayed out late. Inquiry revealed that 
the child was George, Junior, and that he closely resembled 
the father, from whom the mother had separated when the 
baby was nine months old. Her second marriage was also 
unsuccessful and, in her unhappiness, the mother's resent- 
ment toward the child increased further. She asserted 
that every time he displeased her she saw his "no-account 
father coming out in him." "I get so mad at him," she 
admitted, "that I can't whip him myself. I ask my hus- 
band to do it for me." She also reported (this was not 

113 



A Psychology of Growth 

confirmed) that the head of George's school refused to take 
him back after an absence until his- stepfather had spanked 
him in the school office. His teacher was said to have sug- 
gested that a good method of punishment would be to 
make the small boy kneel all day. Naturally, therefore, 
George felt that everyone hated him. He was frightened 
and insecure; and it was not surprising that he ran away 
from home. This is an extreme case, but it illustrates con- 
ditions that, to a certain extent, are behind many behavior 
problems in a large number of children. 

Hostility toward children does not necessarily mean that 
their parents did not want them. It may be due to inse- 
curity in the parents themselves, fatigue, economic worries, 
and lack of information about rearing children. A mother 
who has two or three small children and does all of her 
housework becomes overfatigued and irritable, especially if 
she is not very strong. A father who works long hours or 
has serious financial worries finds that it is hard to be patient 
with children and to enjoy their company. Normal chil- 
dren do many things which, though neither wrong nor 
harmful, are disturbing to adults. Such actions often bring 
about a very unwholesome attitude on the part of parents 
who are already disturbed for other reasons. Attempts of 
the parents to restrict their children's normal (though 
irritating) behavior result in added friction and reinforced 
hostility. 

Anyone who analyzes the behavior problems of children 
would do well to keep in mind two questions: (1) What do 
parents see in a child that is not there but that represents a 
problem in their own minds? (2) What attitudes are the 
parents trying to force upon a child who is not old enough 

114 



Causes of Behavior Problems 

to understand? The answer to the first question usually 
reveals that parents are hostile to a child because he reminds 
them of someone whom they dislike. The second question is 
answered by finding out what qualities the parents consider 
most important in their children. They usually head the 
list with such characteristics as obedience, truthfulness, 
honesty, nobility, cleanliness, good manners, respect, and 
consideration for others. No two parents agree absolutely 
on the order of importance, which suggests that none of these 
characteristics is very vital. When parents are pressed for 
their reasons for considering a certain attribute important, 
they usually cite some unpleasant experience in their own 
childhood that fixed the idea in their minds. Unless these 
prejudices are analyzed for the parents, they will be unable 
to understand that all normal children disobey, lie, steal, 
swear, become noisy, break windows, track mud into the 
house, and often make themselves very annoying to 
adults. 

Further dangers lurk in the tendency of a parent to relive 
his own childhood in his children, to try to force upon them 
a compensation for his own shortcomings and disappoint- 
ments. The case of sixteen-year-old Tom illustrates this 
situation. His grandfather was a very successful business- 
man and an extremely strict parent, who, when his son 
(Tom's father) wanted to study medicine opposed the idea 
and forced the boy to go into business with him. The son, 
in turn, was very strict with his children and tried to com- 
pensate for his own thwarted desire by insisting upon Tom's 
studying medicine, although Tom had no interest in the 
subject. Young Tom was very resentful and, in spite of 
(rather than because of) the way his father treated him, 

115 



A Psychology of Growth . 

asserted that when he had children he would "knock them 
around aplenty" if they didn't mind. 

This type of behavior is very common. A mother whose 
husband wet the bed until he was an adult worried greatly 
over the possibility that her child would do the same thing; 
as a result of that anxiety, he did become a bed wetter. 
Another woman, who got into great difficulty because of 
harmless sex play as a child, later kept a morbid watch over 
her children and was both disturbed and disturbing when 
she saw actions of which she did not approve. Most fathers 
overrate obedience. Those who were brought up very 
strictly and received much corporal punishment usually 
vent their old resentments on their children and demand 
implicit obedience from them. Similarly, the " tough" 
businessman who frightens all his employees, because he 
himself is frightened, insists on efficiency in the home and 
tries to apply his rough-shod business methods to the 
management of his children. 

There is likely to be trouble also when parents do not 
agree about their children. In fact, it disturbs a child more 
to have his parents disagree about discipline and methods 
of. bringing up the family than it does to have them follow 
the poorer of the two methods that they advocate. If, for 
example, the father believes in strict discipline and the 
mother is inclined toward leniency, it is better for them both 
to be either strict or lenient than to pursue the two methods 
at once, because this practice leads to confusion in the 
child's mind. After all, the important consideration is 
neither strictness nor leniency but the necessity for making 
the child feel that he is all right and that his parents 
want him. 

116 



Causes of Behavior Problems 

Parents also err by humiliating a child in the presence of 
others. They may do this consciously or thoughtlessly, but 
the results are the same and cannot be good. For example, 
a very active three-and-a-half-year-old boy was playing in 
the room where his father, presumably a well-educated 
man, was talking to a guest. Some of the child's antics 
were normal activity, some were a dramatization for the 
audience. "John," said the father, "I think you are silly. 
Stop doing that." He repeated this formula six or seven 
times within an hour. Each time, the boy appeared to be 
embarrassed and was quiet for a few minutes; then he would 
begin the same behavior again. Criticism of children in 
another person's presence is never indicated. 

The precept "Do as I say and not as I do" is equally 
harmful. Parents should never expect good conduct to 
result from the hypocritical practice of forcing upon children 
a code that they permit themselves to violate. For ex- 
ample, many children whom the parents reprove for lying 
know very well that their mother and father lie and laugh 
about it. One nine-year-old boy reported with much 
feeling, "If I swear, my dad slaps me in the mouth, but he 
swears all the time." Uncertainty and resentment are 
inevitable consequences of such a situation. 

Other behavior problems are likely to be in the making 
when parents proclaim that they live only for their children. 
It is well to be suspicious of those mothers and fathers who 
constantly complain that they "work their fingers to the 
bone" for their children. They are often persons who are 
desperate for approval and are disappointed when their 
unreasonable labors do not evoke from their children the 
admiration and consideration that they desire. These 

117 



A Psychology of Growth 

parents are unwilling to permit their children to grow up 
and learn to take care of themselves, because keeping them 
dependent gives the mother or the father a false sense of 
importance. 

In analyzing the frustrations of children that are caused 
by these various factors one should remember that they are 
induced less by resentments toward the youngsters than 
by lack of adequate praise and expressions of satisfaction 
with them. Many different elements may be at the root 
of the trouble but, all in all, the problem child is one who 
shows signs of distorted mental growth. 

REFERENCES 

1 . PLANT, JAMES S., "Personality and the Cultural Pattern," 

Commonwealth Fund, Division of Publication, New 
York, 1937. 

2. BERNFIELD, SIEGFRIED, "The Psychology of the Infant," 

translated by Rosetta Hurwitz, Brentano, New York, 
1929. 



118 



Chapter ------------- Nine 



Behavior Problems 

Enuresis is a symptom and indicates that growing up has 
been made too difficult. Enuresis is usually but one of 
many complaints. Fear and resentment are the two main 
causes, with emotional immaturity as a contributing factor. 
Children stop soiling and wetting when they are ready. 

Eating is an important emotional outlet, having physio- 
logical and emotional attributes. All well children eat a 
sufficient amount of food for health and gain. Poor 
appetites in well children are due to coercion. 

Stuttering indicates that the individual is under a great 
deal of tension in his own mind. 

Spoiled children are mentally ill individuals. The con- 
dition is caused by over protection or rejection. 

Stealing may be the normal behavior of well children or 
the compulsive behavior of those who are mentally ill. 



ENURESIS 

ENURESIS, or urinary incontinence, may have organic 
causes, such as defects of the genitourinary organs and 
spina bifida, or cord lesions resulting from trauma, tumor, 
or infection. We are concerned here, however, with that 
large group of children whose urinary incontinence has no 
organic cause. 

Enuresis is about three times as common among boys as 

119 - 



A Psychology of Growth 

among girls. In spite of the fact that there may be no 
organic basis for the condition, the children who suffer from 
it often present striking physical similarities. About 75 
per cent of the boys are small and rather weak and have 
effeminate faces. The girls who wet the bed, on the other 
hand, are more often of a quite opposite type. They are 
likely to be large, clumsy, and unattractive. 

Normally, children assume the responsibility for toilet 
habits during the day when they are twelve to eighteen 
mdnths of age and, during the night, by the time that they 
are two or three years old. Many children, however, con- 
tinue to wet the bed beyond these periods or, after having 
stopped, begin again. This habit often becomes a seri- 
ously disturbing element in the family life, not only because 
of the odors and the additional work that it occasions but 
because the mother does not have a normal mental attitude 
toward her children when one of the older ones wets the bed. 

Parents, therefore, frequently take children to a physician 
because of enuresis. A careful history is likely to reveal 
that this is only one of many complaints in the child, such as 
thumb sucking, nail biting, excessive crying, bad eating 
habits, poor progress in school, and inability to get along 
with other children. When it is the sole complaint, it 
is probably due to organic lesion; when it is one of 
many problems, it can usually be traced to an emotional 
disturbance. 

If a child who once assumed responsibility for toilet 
habits later reverts to bed wetting, it is probable that the 
enuresis followed some unhappy or disturbing experience. 
In many of the cases that have been studied, the enuresis 
began wHen one of the parents, most frequently the mother, 

120 



Behavior Problems 

became ill or was obliged to be away from the family, or 
when the patient had had trouble in school and elsewhere 
outside the home. When enuresis is regarded from the 
point of view of the child's emotions, it appears that fear 
and resentment are important elements. 

Possibly the child wets the bed during very frightening 
dreams. Since fear can cause an individual to lose sphinc- 
ter control even while he is awake, it is not surprising that 
a child who dreams he is being murdered can be sufficiently 
frightened to wet himself at night. This stimulus operates 
the more powerfully because children do not distinguish 
well between imagination and reality and a large percentage 
of them believe that dreams come true. In any case, 
children who wet the bed are almost invariably fearful, 
and their dreams concern terrifying encounters with rob- 
bers, kidnapers, and ghosts. In some cases, however, emo- 
tional immaturity is the predominant factor. 

George, who had nocturnal enuresis off and on up to the 
age of seven, was an extremely apprehensive child. Two 
frightening experiences in his third year had upset him 
rather badly and caused him to cry at night and object to 
sleeping alone. Later, when he entered school, he was 
inattentive and unwilling to work, although he was suf- 
ficiently intelligent. Physically George was slender and 
small for his age, attractive, and very much like his mother. 
This resemblance appeared also in his mental and emotional 
attributes. She, too, was a very fearful individual, whose 
condition was the result of an unhappy childhood, and she 
was still dominated by her mother. During George's 
sickly infancy, she had despaired of rearing him and had 
transmitted her unhealthy attitude to the child. Accus- 

121 



A Psychology of Growth 

tomed to much attention, he became furious when his 
younger sister received any notice. 

George was a very clean, quiet child, who did not adjust 
well to other boys and their rough play. He played with 
girls by preference and said he wished that he had been 
born a girl, because boys did bad things. In his dreams 
he was beaten by a witch, who resembled his mother. His 
daydreams took him back to infancy and he derived satis- 
faction from imagining himself in a crib with his mother 
bending over him, changing his diaper and giving him 
medicine. 

This little boy was taken to a physician because of 
enuresis, but quite obviously the trouble was only a symp- 
tom of a complex mental and emotional problem. 

The other personality disorder frequently observed in 
children subject to enuresis is resentment. In the minds 
of both children and adults, excretory functions appear to 
be closely allied to expressions of this emotion, as has been 
illustrated many times by actual cases. One such case 
is that of one eight-year-old girl whose father, becoming 
infuriated when he found she had taken two cookies instead 
of one, upbraided her for deceit and lying, spanked her, 
and sent her to bed. After that experience, she began to 
wet the bed. 

A younger child, Betty, was taken to a physician because 
of nocturnal enuresis. The condition had been present 
for four years, although prior to its onset the little girl had 
been dry at night for almost a year. At the time of the 
examination, she was six and a half. Her younger sister 
was then four years old; that is, her age coincided with the 
period of Betty's enuresis. 

122 



Behavior Problems 

Every time that Betty went to the physician's office, he 
asked her what she would like to do. One day she answered 
that she wanted to draw. She was given paper and pencil 
and proceeded to draw pictures of a very ugly man and 
woman, whom she labeled "Father" and "Mother," a small 
girl who was designated as baby, and a larger child whom 
she called "the girl." When asked what she wanted this 
family to do, she replied that the baby would turn into a 
witch, who would then change the mother into a witch; 
after that the mother-witch would transform the father and 
"the girl" into witches. In reply to questions about the 
attitude of the girl toward the baby, Betty dilated on the 
hatred that the older child felt for the younger and concluded 
by telling how "the girl" threw the baby out into the yard 
and killed her. Further questioning elicited the informa- 
tion that "the girl" had always hated her sister; she had 
hated the infant the moment she saw her and this feeling 
had increased when she saw the mother nursing her. At 
that time "the girl" hated the mother, too, and wished that 
they would both go away. When the physician asked 
Betty how "the girl" in this play felt about herself, she 
answered that she knew herself to be very bad because she 
hated the mother and the baby and killed the latter. Betty 
added that, because of "the girl's" wickedness, mother 
chased her and beat her. 

While she thus played the part of "the girl," Betty ex- 
pressed her jealousy and her fear in many ways. At the end 
of three-quarters of an hour she said, "This is the end of the 
story. The play is over." In her case, hatred of her sister 
was bound up with fears about herself because she harbored 
this hatred. 

123 



A Psychology of Growth 

At the age of ten, John was still wetting the bed. Inquiry 
showed that his parents had wanted him and had given 
him good care until he was two and a half years old. At 
that time, however, his mother began to work outside the 
home and left little John in the care of his grandmother, 
who never liked the child. Probably because it was she 
who was in charge at the time when John should normally 
have established good toilet habits, he failed to do so, 
although he had previously assumed all responsibilities 
appropriate to his age. Certainly the environmental con- 
ditions were not conducive to normal growth. Another 
factor in the case was the relationship between the boy and 
his sister, who was six years older. After the mother had 
gone to work, the sister often took care of little John and 
played that he was her baby. Up to the time when he 
was examined at the age of ten, he still liked to have his 
sister rock him and to imagine that she was nursing him. 
In his daydreams he was a baby about two years old, he said. 
He expressed few fears and resentments. They must have 
been present when he was placed in his grandmother's care, 
but they were deeply buried in his unconscious mind. At 
the time of his examination, his attitude was one of inde- 
cision. On the one hand, he wanted to grow up and, on 
the other hand, he enjoyed remaining an infant. 

This case illustrates delayed emotional growth, with the 
patient remaining at that level at which he received sufficient 
satisfaction. It contrasts with those cases in which the 
patients first reach a higher level of growth and then, when 
problems become too complex for them, return to a more 
immature stage. These two phenomena occur at all ages 
and enuresis is not the only symptom. 

124 - 



Behavior Problems 

While circumstances vary widely in the many cases 
studied, they present a uniform pattern of environmental 
and innate difficulties. In every case, it is evident that the 
child is having a hard time growing up; the boy, perhaps, 
because his small stature makes him the object of ridicule; 
the girl, because of domestic maladjustments. Under such 
circumstances, the individual does not mature emotionally 
but throws off responsibility and returns to a more satisfying 
emotional level. The resultant enuresis, then, is a con- 
tinuation of or a return to an infantile habit. 

So many therapeutic procedures have been tried in the 
treatment of this condition that the history of enuresis reads 
like the history of therapeutics itself. Practically every 
office therapeutic procedure has been employed in an effort 
to prevent bed wetting, and many other remedies have 
been contributed by the laity. Whenever, in medicine, 
apparent beneficial results are obtained by so many diver- 
gent methods, there can be only one agent common to all. 
That agent is suggestion. 

The fact is that children assume responsibility for toilet 
habits when they are physically and emotionally ready. 
They stop wetting the bed when they want to do so; that is, 
when they have sufficient incentive. The child wishes to 
please adults and to gain the personal satisfaction of accom- 
plishment and will normally overcome his enuresis for these 
reasons. If he fails to do so it is because growing up is too 
difficult for him. The treatment, therefore, consists pri- 
marily of an effort to learn what personal or environmental 
factor causes him to persist in or revert to infantile behavior. 
Enuresis that is caused by insecurities and deep-seated fears 
and resentments requires long psychiatric care. On the 

125 



A Psychology of Growth 

other hand, that which is traced to jealousies, difficulties in 
school, inability to get along with other children, too much 
forceful discipline, and other environmental conditions, can 
be cured by improving the external situation. 

In working directly with the child, praise is very helpful, 
also tangible signs of approbation, such as gold-star charts 
and similar devices. It is possible, also, to teach the child 
that dreams are not true, that he can tell himself in his sleep 
that he is only dreaming, and that therefore he has no need 
to be afraid. He can learn also that it is possible for him 
to wake himself at night, if he wants to end a bad dream 
or if he feels like urinating. In other words, he can stop 
wetting the bed if he chooses, and he can be made aware 
of that fact. 

Many children who really want to stop fail to make the 
effort because they are convinced that the condition is due 
to weak kidneys or bladder or to some other organic cause. 
Any procedure, such as the use of medicine, restriction of 
fluids, and the like, that is based on these assumptions is not 
good medical practice, because it not only fails to teach the 
child responsibility for his actions and to eliminate his 
personality difficulty but also confirms his belief that there 
is something wrong with him organically, when actually 
there is no evidence of disease. Such an attitude is a 
marked characteristic of the neurotic individual. 

Treatment should be directed to the whole child rather 
than to the symptom itself. Enuresis is analogous to a 
fever. The physician is no longer concerned with the fever 
as such but, recognizing that it is one important symptom, 
he looks for and endeavors to eliminate the cause. The 
treatment of enuresis should include (1) making the child 

126 



Behavior Problems 

responsible for himself, (2) psychotherapy, and (3) adjust- 
ment of environmental difficulties. 

Fecal incontinence, a rarer and more serious condition, is 
like enuresis, in that it is very undesirable behavior without 
organic cause. The psychological causes are similar, but 
fecal incontinence is nearly always an expression of intense 
resentment. It occurs almost entirely during the day, 
rather than in the night as is most frequently the case in 
enuresis. 

The case of Edward illustrates these points. He was a 
very intelligent, physically well, good-looking ten-year-old 
who had been soiling himself from two to twelve times a 
week since he was three years of age. When he was taken 
to the doctor for examination because of his incontinence, 
he readily became very talkative. Before the end of an 
hour, he was freely expressing his hatred of his parents and 
admitting that he had daydreams in which he hoped they 
would die. At night he frequently dreamed that his parents 
were killed or that they were killing him. Questioning 
brought out many resentments caused by his parents' 
attitude toward him. He complained that, although his 
father swore, he would slap the boy's mouth if he uttered an 
improper word. Edward also described punishment that 
he had received for bad manners, tardiness, talking back, 
low grades in school, and other unimportant matters. Pre- 
sumably, Edward's parents wanted a child, and apparently 
they had given him fairly adequate care, with the help of 
nurses, during the first few years of his life. By the time 
he was about three, however, they began to be disturbed by 
their own fears that the child would not be accepted socially 
because of racial and other characteristics. For that reason, 

127 



A Psychology of Growth 

they tried to impose impossibly high standards of behavior 
upon him. Unable to meet their requirements, he re- 
sponded with resentment and consequent incontinence. 

Treatment of such a child should be designed to build up 
his self-confidence and sense of security and to resolve his 
mental conflicts. To that end, it is necessary to convince 
the parents also that there is nothing wrong with the child 
and that, if he cannot measure up to their standards, it is 
only because those standards are too high for any child of 
Edward's age. The parents must learn that they can 
accomplish more with praise than with blame. 

FOOD PROBLEMS 

Two of the health problems which cause the greatest con- 
cern today are related to food. These are anorexia in young 
children and obesity in older ones and adults. This is not 
surprising in view of the fact that the acquisition of food is 
among the primary satisfactions of the baby and has been 
described as one of the three basic needs of men, the others 
being sleep and warmth. Eating and drinking are among 
man's foremost emotional outlets and are a great source of 
satisfaction. He takes food not only because he is hungry 
but also for the emotional gratification derived from eating. 
On the other hand, the acquisition of food is one of the 
most complicated of physiological processes and is inti- 
mately associated with emotional growth. Any disturb- 
ance of the process is consequently a matter of decided 
importance. 

Under normal circumstances, all well children eat a 
sufficient quantity of food for health and growth. It is 
necessary only to offer them proper food and to allow them 

128 



Behavior Problems 

to eat as much as they like. Some children require far 
greater amounts of food than others and in this matter each 
individual is his own expert, who knows better than anyone 
else how much he should have. Even in any one individual 
the appetite fluctuates to a very considerable extent. It 
frequently happens that a child will eat a large amount of 
food for a time and then a very small quantity. Sometimes 
he goes on a food jag. That, too, is entirely normal. 

None of the variations would be a matter of any moment 
if parents did not believe that they were. Our forefathers, 
who were not enlightened by radio commercials and 
admonitory magazine and newspaper advertising, took it for 
granted that Johnny would eat when he needed food just 
as he breathed when he needed oxygen and he did. 
Unfortunately, parents of today have become so acutely 
conscious of the importance of food that they often make it 
difficult for Johnny to find satisfaction in eating. They 
have heard that poor appetite is a sign of serious illness, 
that a child should be up to a given weight, that he should 
have so many vitamins and so many minerals, not too much 
starch but plenty of this brand of evaporated milk and that 
brand of canned vegetables. He must have some of these 
foods once a day, some twice, and some three times or he 
will not grow up to be a champion. The constant bom- 
bardment of this sort of propaganda is not only confusing 
but, in the case of apprehensive parents, extremely unset- 
tling. Although their idea of the kind and amount of food 
needed by their children changes from week to week, they 
become seriously disturbed if the youngsters do not accept 
the diet currently advocated by some supposed authority. 
This anxiety, which is more communicable than measles, 

129 



A Psychology of Growth* 

is soon transmitted to the child, often with more or less 
disastrous results. 

Since eating is one of the most important primary pleas- 
ures, any disturbance of that emotional process naturally 
distorts mental growth. It is significant that maladjusted 
or neurotic adults usually exhibit food idiosyncracies. 
They are convinced that something is the matter with them 
because their tastes and habits differ from the model 
presented by a certain diet list or because they are above 
or below the weight designated as normal on some chart 
that they have consulted. Lowell S. Selling, in a study of 
100 draft-board rejectees and 100 traffic offenders, other 
law violators, and domestic-relation cases, found that men's 
tastes and reactions to food were a clear reflection of their 
mental lives. Vitamin deficiencies, for example, appeared 
to be caused not by the inability to get adequate food but 
by the same personality factors that caused draft-board 
rejections and legal offenses. Persons of low mentality 
who violated traffic regulations because of inability to tell 
right from wrong made comparable mistakes in the matter 
of eating. Among the rejectees, most of the neurotics had 
food eccentricities that appeared to be connected with their 
neuroses. None of the rejectees had a diagnosable physio- 
logical ailment, but all complained of indeterminate dis- 
turbances, which they attributed to eating certain kinds or 
combinations of food. 

A child who is in contact with such an individual fre- 
quently becomes alarmed about his own preferences in food. 
If the adult extends the anxiety that he feels about himself 
to include the child, the effect is likely to be serious. The 
child not only begins to fear that he is abnormal, but he 

130 



Behavior Problems 

uses food as the means of obtaining additional attention or 
as a method of fighting back when difficulties become too 
great. Refusal to eat becomes a valuable weapon with 
which he counters parental opposition to some project or 
habit and endeavors to get even with his elders. This may 
begin at a very early age; witness a smart three-year-old 
girl who one day sat with her chin in her hand, looking very 
forlorn, in imitation of her mother. "Mommy worries," 
Frances said, "when I don't eat." 

In a normal household, a food problem often has its 
origin in sickness. Poor appetite is usually the first sign of 
illness shown by a child. Parents understand that, but they 
do not know, or, in their anxiety, seldom remember the 
converse, that convalescence is marked by the return of 
appetite. If they restrain their impatience to have the child 
eat until he is ready to do so, no harm will be done. By 
urging him to eat before he has the desire for food, they 
accomplish no immediate good and may do much ultimate 
harm. 

Frances, mentioned above, further dramatized the prob- 
lem. After eating breakfast at half past seven, she played 
out of doors until dinnertime, at one o'clock. She had a 
slight cold and, by the time she came to the table, she was 
extremely tired. Although she ate very little dinner, she 
asked for cake for dessert. She ate only a few bits of cake, 
however, and then asked for pie. After she was given the 
pie, which she did not eat, she demanded cookies and candy. 
When they were denied her, she cried bitterly and, as her 
mother carried her from the room, she said tearfully, "I 
want candy, I want cookies, I want jello, I want !" What 
she wanted was someone to rock her to sleep, but since she 

131 



A Psychology of Growth ' 

did not realize what her desire was, she expressed her 
unsatisfied need in the form of a demand for various foods. 

A doctor, when a mother calls him to say that her child 
has suddently refused to eat, is almost certain that the 
youngster has a mild throat infection or is developing some 
other illness. This condition often continues for several 
days, during which the child's appetite remains poor and 
he may become pale and lose some weight. Alarmed by 
this situation, the parents may try to force the child to eat 
and he then reacts in the normal way; that is, forced feeding 
makes food distasteful to him; if it is carried too far, he 
vomits. In a few days, when he recovers from his infection, 
his appetite should normally return but by that time food 
has become so repulsive to him that he is unable to eat, 
even though he may be hungry. Therein lies a common 
battle between parents and their children. 

"My child won't eat" is today the reason most frequently 
given by parents for consulting physicians and nurses. Yet 
food problems are a new development. Until about forty 
years ago there was no such thing as anorexia except during 
illness. The problem is a product of the rapid advance in 
our knowledge of nutrition, unaccompanied by sufficient 
judgment to apply our new-found information wisely. It 
is one thing to sit down and figure out the number of calories 
that we think a child needs and decide upon the kinds of 
food that should supply them, and quite another thing to 
require the child to accept the concoctions we have selected 
and eat the quantity we have decreed. This is impossible, 
even in the case of a newborn baby; as the child grows older, 
we fall farther and farther from the mark. We know the 
various essential food elements and the approximate 

- 132 



Behavior Problems 

amounts of each that a child requires at any given age; he 
alone knows what he wants in a given day. Probably 
dietitians have greatly hampered child feeding by their 
great skill in making all kinds of undesirable food acceptable 
to the palate. Nevertheless, when we give children plain 
simple foods meat, potatoes, vegetables, bread, butter, 
milk, and fruits and leave them alone they eat a sufficient 
variety and sufficient quantities to meet any nutritional 
requirements. That is why our ancestors, without benefit 
of nutritionists, avoided the food problems that beset their 
supposedly well-informed descendants. 

STUTTERING OR STAMMERING 

Stuttering is one of the most disturbing handicaps that 
is met in medicine. Although it has been the subject of 
much study and research, theories regarding stuttering 
remain protean. In a very excellent book, Hahn 1 sum- 
marizes the theories of some twenty-five or thirty American 
and European authorities on the subject of stuttering, show- 
ing that no two of these investigators agree as to the exact 
cause of the condition. In general, however, they regard 
stuttering as a neurosis caused by a persistence of infantile 
frustrations into later life, a psychological inhibition that 
has an emotional basis, or the result of a combined physio- 
logical and functional defect. All the authorities agree 
that as a stammerer approaches adolescence he becomes 
greatly disturbed about his handicap and develops serious 
personality difficulties. 

Stammering usually begins at the discipline age (two or 
three years), upon entering school, or at adolescence. The 
child who begins to stammer at adolescence usually gives a 

133 



A Psychology of Growth 

history of difficulties earlier in life. It is known that stam- 
mering is more common in boys than in girls and that most 
persistent stammerers are boys, but we have no satisfactory 
explanation for these facts. 

From a clinical standpoint, we see children begin to 
stammer' when they are placed under excessive tension in 
the home. That is probably the reason why many children 
who talk correctly when they first learn to speak become 
stammerers at the discipline age. The onset often occurs 
at the end of infancy, when the growing child becomes very 
active and the mother tries to keep him quiet. It may 
coincide with the visits of grandparents or other relatives 
who exercise too much authority over the youngster, or it 
may appear when the parents become anxious and try to 
eliminate some habit that they consider undesirable; again, 
it may begin when the little boy or girl becomes very 
frightened for any cause and cannot throw off this anxiety. 
The following cases are illustrative. 

Robert began to stammer when he was three years old. 
His was an acute condition, which came on while his father 
was away on a business trip and the mother was living alone 
with the little boy and his baby sister. The mother lacked 
self-confidence and had difficulty in managing the home. 
Robert was an aggressive, active youngster whom the 
mother felt she had to watch closely and, at times, discipline 
severely because she was afraid of what her friends would 
think of her. A few nights before the onset of the stam- 
mering, this mother went on an errand and asked a neighbor 
to watch the house, from her own home. After a short 
time the neighbor heard Robert screaming. He had 

134 - 



Behavior Problems 

awakened and become very frightened when he found that 
his mother was not there. For several nights he cried out 
in his sleep and, during the day, came in from play at fre- 
quent intervals to make sure that his mother was at home. 
After the parents revised their method of handling Robert 
and devoted a good deal of time to him every day, he 
stopped stammering in a few weeks, 

Jerry began to stammer a few weeks after he entered 
first grade in school. At that time he did not play well 
with other children. His kindergarten teacher described 
him as a high-strung, sensitive boy who cried easily. At 
home also he cried excessively and fought more than the 
average child would with a younger brother. According 
to his mother, he had always been thin and did not eat as 
well as she thought he should. He had a tendency to left- 
handedness and had stammered slightly when he was about 
three years old. Altogether he was a sensitive, insecure 
little boy who had never made a good adjustment. His 
schoolteacher was very strict and emphasized promptness, 
gentlemanliness, and cooperation. Under all these cir- 
cumstances the first-grade program was too difficult for 
him and the confusion over handedness was an additional 
factor in the development of his stammering. 

In order to help him overcome this handicap, he was 
placed in another first-grade room where the teacher was 
less tense and understood the nature of his problem. His 
parents made an effort to build up his self-confidence and 
an excellent playground instructor helped him to learn how 
to get along with other children. His fears of being hurt 
and not being liked were discussed with him. In six or 

135 - 



A Psychology of Growth 

eight months his stammering disappeared, but unless a care- 
ful program is continued for many years, his difficulties 
may return. 

In origin, stammering is not unlike other anxiety mani- 
festations. For example, many an individual who can walk 
back and forth easily on an eight-inch plank that is placed 
on the ground would fall off if he attempted to walk the 
same plank suspended forty feet in the air. Similarly, the 
stammerer has been compared to the child who is proud of 
a new pair of shoes and is so anxious to keep them in good 
condition that he inevitably stumbles and skins the toe. In 
other words, a child's fear that he cannot perform a given 
act that involves motor coordination may make it very 
difficult for him to perfom that act. 

Studies of schools have shown that, over a period of 
twenty years, ten times as many stammerers develop in one 
first-grade room than in another. The room that has the 
large number of stammerers is the one where the teacher is 
tense and frightens her pupils. It appears, therefore, that 
stammering is related to definite fears. Although these 
fears inhibit thinking, nevertheless, the child attempts to 
speak. While he is waiting for his thinking to clear up so 
that he can express himself, his speech becomes a repetition 
of one sound or a return to many sounds and movements 
that he made as an infant. 

In stammering there is also a persistence of sucking or 
infantile chewing, swallowing, and breathing actions. For 
a detailed description of this approach to stammering, read 
"For Stutterers, 35 by Smiley Blanton and Margaret Gray 
Blanton. 2 One twelve-year-old boy described the con- 

136 



Behavior Problems 

dition well by saying that when he stammered he went just 
like a baby sheep, baa-baa-baa. There is much about a 
stammerer's general behavior that is infantile, and he does 
not mature emotionally. 

Many children begin to stammer when they are two or 
three years old, but in most cases the condition clears up 
in a few weeks without any special treatment. It is good 
practice, therefore, to make no effort to correct a child, 
but rather to wait and see whether or not he will improve 
spontaneously. Parents should be told not to try to silence 
a child who is stammering and not to ask him to repeat 
what he has said, as stammerers can always repeat correctly. 
Neither should they attempt to force a child to talk more 
slowly, or offer any other suggestions. The best thing they 
can do is to ignore the youngster's difficulty entirely. In 
this way, they can possibly relieve the general tension under 
which the child has been living and that may be sufficient 
to end the stammering. It has been found also that rest 
in bed and sedation will cause the condition to disappear 
temporarily. In order to effect a cure, however, the sources 
of anxiety should be investigated and eliminated* 

In the case of a young child, stammering that does not 
disappear within four to six weeks requires a more careful 
investigation. This should be directed (1) toward dis- 
covering the superficial conditions in the home that have 
placed the youngster under tension, and (2) toward remedy- 
ing these conditions. If the stammering still persists after 
these measures have been taken, it may be regarded as a 
psychiatric problem. Treatment of the child then makes 
it necessary to determine what anxieties in the minds of the 

137 



A Psychology of Growth 

patient or the parents are causing the emotional disturb- 
ance. Stammering in a six-year-old or an adolescent is 
serious and calls for psychiatric help. 

SPOILED CHILDREN 

The term "spoiled child," which has no scientific mean- 
ing, has come to have little significance of any kind, owing 
to the fact that it is so often applied to the youngster who 
exhibits any behavior that does not meet with adult ap- 
proval. Because this designation is in such common usage, 
however, it might be well to look at the typical "spoiled 
child" and try to explain the reason for his behavior. 

Generally he is that tyrannical youngster who, in order 
to gain his own ends or to annoy his parents, teachers, and 
others, deliberately does things that he knows are objection- 
able. A child of this type makes immoderate demands, 
which he himself realizes are impossible of fulfillment. He 
is negativistic, disrespectful, unreasonable, and usually 
destructive. He does not respond to ordinary methods of 
management, either in the form of praise or in that of 
discipline. Although he is thoroughly disagreeable to live 
with, objective observation shows that he is not a bad child 
but one who is very unhappy. His behavior is seriously 
abnormal. When small children or even grown ones, 
for that matter defy their parents, they are acting in 
desperation. 

"Spoiled children" fall into two categories those who 
feel that they are unwanted or that they do not meet with 
approval, and those who are overprotected. Two typical 
cases illustrate the results of these conditions. 

Eight-year-old Arthur was a "spoiled brat." His teach- 

138 



Behavior Problems 

ers said so. In the classroom he whispered incessantly, 
jabbed other children with pencils, made noises, refused to 
"get down to business," and was disturbing in every way. 
What the teacher minded most was the broad grin that he 
always wore when she corrected him. This infuriated her 
so greatly that she spent a considerable part of her time 
watching the boy and trying various methods of humiliating 
him and "taking the cockiness out of him." On the play- 
ground he fought with other children and made himself a 
nuisance in many ways. 

At home it was the same. Although the parents had 
tried many different disciplinary measures, he persisted in 
teasing his sister and brother, taking their toys, and fighting 
with them. When there was company in the house, he 
never failed to "show off." Most significantly, he had 
nightmares in which he was being pursued by a* witch or 
killed by giants, one of whom he identified as his own father. 
Obviously he was a very insecure little boy, who harbored 
the painful idea that he was bad and of no account. 

A careful case history revealed that the boy belonged to 
the type that is active from the moment of birth. As a baby 
he had colic and kept his parents up many nights. In their 
view, he was always a difficult child, becoming more dif- 
ficult as he grew older. When he learned how to walk and 
climb, he climbed and walked over the best furniture and 
into forbidden places in spite of all admonitions. This 
behavior distressed the parents all the more because it con- 
trasted sharply with the model conduct of an older sister. 
Then, before Arthur was past his own infancy, his mother 
gave birth to another boy, whom she described as the most 
precious baby in the world. At the time when Arthur was 

139 



A Psychology of Growth 

brought in for examination, the mother frankly admitted 
that she did not like him as much as she did the other 
children. The father, a successful businessman, was one 
of those aggressive, efficient individuals who, because they 
are basically frightened themselves, try to control everyone 
else by fear. He asserted that he could never understand 
Arthur but believed that the mother had spoiled him. 

All the facts showed that Arthur was a rejected child, who 
was neither understood nor accepted by his parents. Be- 
cause it was his nature to fight back when insulted, he 
became a troublesome little boy. Obviously, in order to 
cure the boy, it was necessary to treat the parents and 
teachers. They had to understand that his behavior was 
the result of his feeling that he did not enjoy their approval 
and his conviction that he was not liked. Since he never 
received favorable attention, he felt compelled to do things 
that would bring unfavorable notice and, until he could 
feel that he was wanted and liked, no amount of disciplinary 
action would correct his behavior. 

After we have studied the attitudes of Arthur's parents 
and teachers, we can readily see the reasons for his behavior. 
A child, however, does not understand them and could not 
alter conditions if he did. Adults who say that a child 
does things to get attention often imply that his behavior 
is inexcusable and expect him to change merely by telling 
him so, usually in a scornful manner. Granted that the 
child misbehaves to gain attention, he still cannot help act- 
ing in this way. Saying that he does things for attention is 
like saying that he has a fever. In either case, the patient 
is ill and, if we are to help him get well, we must deter- 
mine the cause and eradicate it. We must remember that 

140 



Behavior Problems 

children, like adults, do the best they can. When we 
know all the factors that are involved, we can see that the 
behavior of the "spoiled brat" is as logical as the adult acts 
of wisdom about which we like to boast. When his conduct 
is unsatisfactory, it is necessary to determine why he is 
acting in this way and to improve his environmental con- 
ditions. 

Jimmy was another "spoiled child." At the age of nine 
and a half, he resorted to violent temper tantrums as a 
means of getting his own way. Frequently he would throw 
himself on the floor and beat his head until his parents gave 
in to .him. When he came home from school, he would 
demand that his mother stop whatever she was doing in 
order to play with him and, if she refused, he would push 
and slap her until she acceded to his demands. His school- 
mates disliked him and, although he had a high I.Q., he did 
not get along well in school because he refused to do the 
work that his teacher assigned. 

Unlike the boy previously studied, Jimmy was an only 
child. Although the parents were eager to have children, 
they had been married six years before Jimmy was born. 
He was received, therefore, both with delight and with 
apprehension that caused the parents to watch over him 
constantly. The overzealous mother fed and dressed him 
until he was five years old and gave him everything that he 
wanted. As a result, he continued to use an infantile type 
of speech, to suck his thumb, and to wet the bed. At the 
age of nine, he took little responsibility for himself. 

Here, then, was an uncertain, dissatisfied boy, who tried 
to relieve his unhappiness by making demands. Because 
he had not been permitted to grow up and do the things 

141 - 



A Psychology of Growth 

of which he was capable, his behavior remained infantile, 
and he used temper tantrums to force his parents to do what 
he asked. 

Children whose objectionable behavior causes people to 
call them spoiled may be either those who are used as an 
emotional outlet for their parents and not allowed to grow 
up, or those who are rejected and made to feel that they 
do not meet with approval. They are emotionally imma- 
ture, frightened, and resentful. Their mental growth is 
altered, just as another child's bones are bent as the result 
of rickets and malnutrition. They should be regarded as 
children who are unable to grow emotionally, and it is 
necessary to find out how and why their growth has been 
retarded. 

Not all psychiatrists agree about the causes that produce 
spoiled children, especially children like Jimmy. He is an 
example of maternal, really parental, overprotection. 
Levy 3 holds the opinion that the behavior of such children 
is always due to unconscious rejection. Other psychiatrists 
believe that some of these children are hated, while some 
are affected by the insecurity and overanxiety of parents. 
Clearly, the first of the two cases is an example of maternal 
rejection. In the second, the child was wanted but the 
parents, especially the mother, were very insecure. She 
was always afraid that something would happen to her 
child and got the greatest satisfaction from giving him more 
affection and care than he needed or wanted. As a result, 
this boy remained infantile. 

STEALING 

Among the many problems about which parents consult 
physicians and nurses is that which is commonly called 
142 



Behavior Problems 

disobedience. From the point of view of the parent, this is 
a serious offense; viewed objectively, it is the result of the 
parents' attempts to force their children to meet standards 
that are often unreasonable or to other frustrations in the 
growing child. This applies as much to stealing as to other 
lapses that parents view with less consternation. It is 
necessary, therefore, to distinguish between those few cases 
in which stealing is due to real mental illness and the great 
majority, where the problem is simply one of parental 
education. 

Authorities on the subject of behavior know that it is as 
natural for children to lie, swear, and steal as it is for them 
to track mud into the house, wipe their dirty hands on the 
towel, make noise, break a window now and then, and 
disturb the neighbors. This is particularly true of the 
preadolescent group. These children are enjoying their 
last fling before being engulfed by the restrictions of adult 
society. It is a statistical fact, borne out by psychiatric 
studies, that this behavior is not abnormal and does not lead 
to difficulties in adult life. The fact is that those children 
who do none of these things are the ones who develop mental 
ill-health when they grow up. 

There is a type of stealing, however, that is pathological. 
This is behavior of a compulsive nature. Children exhibit 
it by breaking loose and stealing articles that they neither 
want nor need. They make little or no effort to conceal 
what they have done and feel better after they have been 
punished. 

A good illustration of this type of behavior is found in the 
case of nine-and-a-half-year-old Frederick. This child, the 
son of a high-school teacher and an efficiency expert, was 
brought up by a grandmother, who prided herself on her 

143 



A Psychology of Growth 

competence and her determination to make the boy under- 
stand that when she issued an order he was to carry it out 
to the letter. From her point of view, he was, most of the 
time, an exemplary little boy, obedient, clean, quiet, and 
polite. Off and on, however, he wet the bed and occasion- 
ally went through periods when he set fires and, in his 
mother's words, "stole everything he could get his hands 
on." 

Frederick's difficulties bring to mind a statement made 
by Dr. A. A. Brill. "It is not easy to be a civilized person," 
Dr. Brill said, "to wash your hands and comb your hair and 
act at all times like a lady or gentleman. If you continue 
to behave this way for a very long time you are likely to 
burst, in order to ease the tension. For that reason, human 
beings have made certain by-passes for themselves, in order 
to provide some sort of outlet for their pent-up feelings." 
The by-passes that Brill was discussing were motion pictures, 
prize fights, and other forms of amusement. Frederick, 
too, needed to find some outlet or he must burst. It was 
impossible for him to behave like a nice old lady for 365 
days a year. When the tension became too great, he 
relieved it by stealing and setting fires, instead of employing 
any of the outlets sanctioned by society. 

Work with the boy revealed, naturally, that he was con- 
vinced that he was bad and worthless and that nobody 
liked him. He had intense resentments, particularly 
against his grandmother and his mother, and because of 
his feeling he was oppressed by a sense of great guilt. 
Apparenty he made an enormous effort, most of the time, 
to win his elders' approval and attention; but being an 
active, alert, intelligent, aggressive boy, he could not always 

. 144 



Behavior Problems 

live up to their foolish expectations and every so often he 
broke loose. 

One frequent cause of compulsive stealing is an intense 
sense of guilt that comes from indulging in homosexual 
activities. This applies almost exclusively to boys and 
appears especially in the late preadolescent or early ado- 
lescent stage of growth. Such a boy is so disturbed by the 
bad things he has been doing that he wants to be punished. 
Rather than admit the real cause for his sense of guilt, 
however, he takes to stealing, which, in comparison, appears 
to be a respectable form of misconduct. Letting people 
know that he has been stealing and taking his punishment 
for being bad relieves his guilty feeling and, at the same 
time, covers up what he considers his really serious sin. 

Compulsive behavior of this kind is a sign of mental 
illness. It is important to recognize this fact and the 
corollary, that it can never be corrected by corporal punish- 
ment, or, for that matter, any kind of punishment. It is a 
mistake to place the patient in a military or a boarding 
school, because that step will not correct the condition that 
is responsible for his compulsive behavior. This type of 
behavior should be considered a symptom, such as fever 
or labored breathing or any other indication of an organic 
illness. 

Even when a child's behavior is so objectionable that 
we feel we cannot tolerate it, we must realize that it is the 
inevitable outcome of his experience. The misconduct of 
the so-called mean kid is just as logical as the considered 
acts of wise men. Our inability to understand the reasons 
for it is an acknowledgment of our lack of wisdom or infor- 
mation and does not indicate that the behavior is unreason- 

145 - 



A Psychology of Growth 

able. We must recognize that undesirable behavior is the 
outcome of a person's attempt (whether he is a child or an 
adult) to find an outlet for his unsolved problems and to 
gain satisfaction or expression of his growth needs. In all 
probability, he is motivated by fears, resentments, and a 
sense of guilt, on the one hand, and on the other, by the 
need for approval. It is fortunate that he is aggressively 
trying to find a solution. This makes the prognosis better 
than it would be if he became a shut-in, "broken" individual. 

REFERENCES 

1. HAHN, EUGENE F., "Stuttering," Stanford University 

Press, Stanford University, Calif. 

2. BLANTON, SMILEY, and MARGARET GRAY BLANTON, 

"For Stutterers," D. Appleton-Century Company, 
Inc., 1936. 

3. LEVY, DAVID M., M.D., "Maternal Overprotection," 

Columbia University Press, New York. 



146 



Chapter ------------- Ten 



Preadolescence 

For boys this is the almighty age of growth. Girls 
mature more rapidly and have more grown-up interests. 
Serious anxiety states appear at this age. They occur in 
rejected children (more often girls) who have had impossible 
standards of behavior imposed upon them during infancy 
and childhood. Anorexia nervosa is a serious nutritional 
disturbance in girls who refuse to eat a sufficient amount of 
food. The condition is emotional in nature and is caused 
by fears of growing up. 



PREADOLESCENCE is the period between childhood and 
puberty. Although the growth patterns are the same 
in all children, there is considerable variation in the chrono- 
logical ages of boys and girls in this period of development. 
Sex hormones are secreted and found in the urine of some 
girls at the age of four and a half years, while in others this 
phenomenon does not begin until they are seven or eight. 
On the average, however, preadolescence extends from the 
age of eight to the age of twelve. Younger boys and girls 
play well together, but during preadolescence an antago- 
nism develops between the sexes. Often there is so much 
open hostility that boys and girls not only refuse to play 
together but often fight one another. 

. 147 



A Psychology of Growth 

For boys this is the almighty age. They are absorbed 
in their new growth and have a feeling of manliness; but 
not being sure of themselves, they have to prove their 
strength and independence to themselves and to everyone 
with whom they are associated. They form groups, reject 
adult ideas, and say, "I don't care." They have un- 
bounded energy, which they expend mainly in physical 
pursuits, such as all forms of athletics, or building club 
houses and tunnels. They would like to become airplane 
pilots. The adventures of Tom Sawyer and Huckleberry 
Finn and Superman thrill them. They play war games, 
occasionally like to make other children unhappy, and 
sometimes carry their domination to the point of sadism. 
During this period, they appraise their physical develop- 
ment and compare themselves with others. Their own 
shortcomings give them great concern and they often be- 
come frightened by the thought that they are abnormal. 

Preadolescent boys think that girls are stupid and silly 
and are often contemptuous of them. "I don't see how 
you can be so dumb," one eleven-year-old boy said to the 
girl whom he later married. The girl was crushed, but 
afterward she confessed that she had thought the boy was 
wonderful in spite of what he had said. 

Schools find preadolescence a difficult age. The boys 
show off, feign indifference, and in general, either show 
contempt for a woman teacher or fall in love with her. 
Some progressive schools put boys and girls in different 
classes, in the belief that the separation makes administra- 
tion easier and more successful. 

During this growth period, a boy first attempts to be 
independent, especially from his mother. Actually, of 

148 



Preadolescence 

course, he is still very dependent upon her, though he feels 
that women don't "know the score." Usually he idealizes 
his father but resents any effort on Dad's part to "boss" him 
or control his behavior. 

Girls manifest an increased activity during preadoles- 
cence. Although they have little sex interest, they want to 
appear grown up and, more than boys, attempt to adapt 
themselves to the realities of life. They dramatize them- 
selves and like to assume adult roles with the appropriate 
properties and costuming, such as higher heels and lipstick. 
This play, however, is accompanied by much giggling and 
self-consciousness. Some girls, on the other hand, become 
tomboys. They are accepted by boys, in contradistinction 
to the boy who is effeminate and likes to play with girls. 
Ridicule is his portion. 

Girls are hurt if they are not included among the leaders 
in their schools and neighborhoods. Their clubs are secret 
societies. In one private school there has been a "devil's 
club" formed by succeeding groups for many years. The 
rules of the club require members to use their fingers for 
handling butter, to collect cigarette butts, and to smoke. 
Girls have secrets which they confide to every other girl 
with the solemn assurance, "You are the only person I am 
going to tell." 

At this age girls are tormented by feelings of inferiority 
and inadequacy. As a result of this condition, coupled 
with a desire for independence, they criticize their parents 
and often identify themselves with older girls and wojnen. 
Some girls, overwhelmed by a sense of inferiority, become 
quiet, passive, and very unhappy. A greater proportion of 
them, however, outwardly exhibit a noisy self-assurance. 

- 149 - 



A Psychology of Growth 

Preadolescent girls also work out plans for their future 
and concern themselves with problems far beyond the 
interest of boys of the same age. Girls try to appear sophis- 
ticated, do better schoolwork than boys, and attempt to 
gain recognition from adults. Sally Benson has described 
this age group very well in her book, "Junior Miss." 

Like boys, girls have many anxieties about their physical 
growth. Breast development, growth of pubic and axillary 
hair, size of abdomen, and posture concern them greatly. 
While their physiological development is usually a source 
of pride, they are sometimes sensitive about it and, if they 
are very dependent upon their mothers, they may go so far 
as to attempt to reject their maturity emotionally and, in 
extreme cases, develop anorexia nervosa. Such was the case 
with Barbara, a ten-and-a-half-year-old girl, who became 
antisocial and unhappy. She imagined that she was unat- 
tractive because her skin was dark, her abdomen protruded, 
and one breast was larger than the other. An eleven-year- 
old boy was similarly disturbed because comparison at the 
"club" revealed that his genitals were smaller than those 
of his associates. 

Serious anxiety states are not infrequent during the pre- 
puberty years, that is, from eight to eleven. They occur 
about three times as often in girls as in boys and resemble 
those of the adult with an anxiety neurosis. The child 
suddenly becomes panic stricken, cries, and is overwhelmed 
by the fear of terrible illness and possible death. This state 
may be accompanied by perspiration, choking, gagging, 
rery rapid heart, trembling, stomach-ache, dizziness, or 
any other somatic complaint. The attack usually subsides 
in thirty minutes to two hours. Inquiry into the cause 

150 - 



Preadolescence 

nearly always reveals that an anxiety attack has been pre- 
cipitated by some unhappy occurrence, such as an un- 
pleasant hospital experience, a serious fright, or the death 
of a friend or relative. 

Children who have these attacks are almost invariably 
the good boys and girls, approved by their elders because 
they are quiet, obedient, and respectful. They are, in 
other words, children who have been broken to the will of 
adults, sensitive children who have never been able to fight 
back. Further inquiry usually reveals that, in addition to 
having to conform to high standards of behavior, they have 
been held to very rigid food and training schedules, espe- 
cially during infancy. They have been fed every four hours, 
to the minute, have been broken from the bottle when very 
young, have been the subject of attempts at early toilet 
training, and have been taught obedience to authority 
without question. Work with mothers and fathers nearly 
always reveals the still more significant fact that these 
children were not wanted in the first place and never 
enjoyed the affection that their sisters and brothers received 
from one or the other or from both of the parents. 

These various factors are illustrated in the case of Sally, 
a pretty, intelligent ten-year-old girl who was taken to a 
physician for examination because of spells during which 
she cried, gagged, and said, "Am I going to die?" The 
attacks usually occurred at night, but occasionally they 
came on in the morning. Sally had the first one on her 
ninth birthday. Thereafter they recurred frequently, and 
the child lost weight, refused to go to school or to church, 
and finally preferred not to leave her home at all. 

Study of the case revealed that one of Sally's friends had 

151 



A Psychology of Growth 

died about four weeks before she had her first attack. The 
day before the attack occurred, Sally's teacher had lectured 
her pupils severely on the subject of some objectionable 
behavior. Little Sally, who had always been a good child, 
was not at fault, but the teacher's words frightened her 
badly and she became extremely fearful of doing something 
wrong and incurring displeasure. On her birthday, the 
child suffered a great disappointment. The mother, who 
was not feeling well because of her fourth pregnancy, failed 
to give Sally a birthday present. On that day, the little 
girl had her first attack. 

After several interviews, the mother was able to say 
frankly that she had never loved Sally as much as she loved 
her two older children and the new baby. Although she 
was not able to account exactly for the difference in her 
feelings for the children, she recognized the fact that there 
was something about Sally which she did not like. She 
realized also that the strict schedule and rigid discipline 
that she had inflicted upon the little girl were, at least in 
part, an expression of resentment toward her. 

The child revealed to the physician that she had many 
frightening dreams, in which she was chased by a burglar 
and a witch. Eventually she volunteered the information 
that the burglar resembled her father and that, at times 
when the witch removed her mask, she proved to be Sally's 
mother. When the physician had obtained the child's con- 
fidence, she began to talk about her fears of her parents and 
teachers and her resentments toward them. Finally she 
admitted that she hated both her parents and her teachers, 
as well as her brothers and sister. After a number of talks 
with the physician, Sally realized that her attacks were 

152 



Prtadolescencc 

brought on by fears that accompanied her hates, especially 
her feeling toward her mother. The first attack, it must 
be remembered, occurred on the birthday when the mother 
failed to give the child a present. 

The little girl, who had received a very strict religious 
training and had been convinced that it was a serious sin 
to hate, did not doubt that she was a very bad girl. That 
attitude was intensified by the fact that she was physio- 
logically very mature for her age and was fast approaching 
puberty, which is a time when children become increasingly 
aware of what people think of them and when they ex- 
perience a heightening of conscience. 

The table on page 154 summarizes ten cases of acute 
anxiety states studied by the writer. When the patients 
are studied as a group, the similarity of the cases, particu- 
larly in regard to precipitating factors, becomes readily 
apparent and it is possible to see how unfavorable conditions 
bring about mental ill-health. 

Visual disturbances on a functional basis, apparently 
due to spasm of the blood vessels, often begin during the 
preadolescent period and occur with increasing frequency 
into adulthood. It is possible to get tubular vision (in 
which the patient can see only objects directly in front of 
him) or marked generalized decrease in vision or hemia- 
nopsia. The following cases illustrate this condition. 

On Christmas Eve, when ten-year-old Frank was playing 
with his toys, he found that he could see only those objects 
that were directly in front of him. A careful history 
revealed that he had many fears, that he thought he was 
bad, and had been taught that if he did not behave Santa 
Glaus would not bring him any presents. All of a sudden 

- 153 



A Psychology of Growth 



FEARS 



Case: 
Sex: 

Age at 
onset 


Precipi- 
tating 
condition 


Parental 
attitude 


Schedule 
in 
infancy 


Result o 
training 
program 


Primary 
fear 


Outstand- 
ing 
symptom 


Panic 


1 F 


Death of 


Rejection 


Rigid 


Broken 


Hate of father 


Abdominal 


Fear of ill- 


9H 


friend 


(father) 






mother, and 


distress 


ness and 


yr3. 




Apprehen- 






brother 




death 






sion 
















(mother) 












2 F 


Death of 


Extreme 


Rigid 


Broken 


Hate of 


Nausea 


Fear of ill- 


7 


mother 


appre- 






mother 




ness and 




of 


hension 










death 




school- 
















mate 














3F 


Sex in- 


Rejection 


Rigid 


Broken 


Hate of 


Nausea 


Fear of ill- 


9 


struction 


(mother) 






mother, fear 


and vomit- 


ness 












of sex 


ing 




4 M 


Death of 


Rejection 


Rigid 


Broken 


Hate of 


Trembling 


7ear of be- 


10 


friend 


Appre- 






mother, 




ing killed 






hension 






father, and 
















friend 






5 M 




Extreme 


Semi- 


Broken 


Hate of father, 


Pain in 


[llness and 


9 




appre- 


rigid 




mother, and 


joints and 


death 






hension 






brother 


extremities 




6 F 


Death of 


Rejection 


? 


Broken 


Hate of 


Abdominal 


Fear of 


8 


sister 








mother and 


pain 


T.B., 












sister 




menin- 
















gitis 


7 F 




Rejection 


?.igid 


Broken 


Hate of 


Trembling 


mpending 


9M 




Apprehen- 






mother and 


and crying 


danger 






sion 






brother 






8 F 




Rejection 


^.igid 


Broken 


Hate of 


Trembling 


llness 


10 










mother and 


and ab- 














sister 


dominal 
















pain 




9 F 


Exhibi- 


Rejection 


Rigid 


Broken 


Hate of family 


nability to 


Suffoca- 


8 


tionism; 








and teacher 


recite in 


tion 




fear of 










school 






teacher 














10 F 


? 


Apprehen- 


Rigid 


? 


? 


? 


? 


mos. 




sion 
















Rejection 













he became very frightened, imagining that someone was 
coming after him and that a burglar was looking in through 
the window. It was then that the visual disturbance began. 
When Frank was able to analyze his fears with the help 
154 



Preadolescence 

of a physician, the difficulty cleared up and has not recurred 
during the succeeding ten years. 

Christine, a fourteen-year-old high-school girl, suddenly 
"went blind" after class. The attack lasted about thirty 
minutes and was followed by many others of shorter dura- 
tion. At the time of the first attack, she went to the school 
nurse and, later, to an ophthalmologist, who found nothing 
wrong with her eyes. She was a highly intelligent but 
emotionally disturbed adolescent. Inquiry revealed that 
she had never lost all of her vision, as she had first reported 
(these patients do not become totally blind), since she had 
been able to go to the school nurse without assistance. 
The first attack had been precipitated by a scolding, in the 
course of which a teacher had accused her unfairly, the 
girl believed of doing inaccurate work. Analysis of her 
case showed the girl that she suffered a diminution of vision 
when she became very frightened. 

ANOREXIA NERVOSA 

The uncommon, but serious, condition known as anorexia 
nervosa is characterized by loss of weight, evasiveness, lack 
of normal interests, and sometimes difficulties in school. 
It usually begins during the preadolescent or the early 
adolescent period. The physical examination is negative, 
except for emaciation and possible food-deficiency diseases. 
The condition occurs in girls who are extremely dependent 
upon their mothers and who reject the idea of normal 
physiological development. 

Such was the case with Janet. She had been well, up to 
the age of twelve, when she expressed a dislike for fattening 
foods and began to lose weight. She ate nothing but 

155 . 



A Psychology of Growth 

vegetables in small quantities, skim milk, and fruit. At 
the same time, in an effort to deceive her parents about the 
amount of food that she was consuming, she used many 
different devices, such as eating by herself whenever pos- 
sible, secreting food in her handkerchief and later throwing 
it away, and disposing of her milk whenever no one was 
watching. She insisted that she was not hungry, failed to 
eat lunch at school, and feigned illness at mealtime when 
she was at home. When her loss of weight became serious, 
she was placed in a hospital, where all tests for organic 
disease were negative. 

Janet's mother was a very self-centered, neurotic woman, 
who criticized the girl a great deal. When Janet reached 
preadolescence, she became a tomboy and, because she was 
a good baseball player, boys accepted her as a playmate. 
Because she wanted to be a boy, she was disturbed when she 
noticed that her hips were getting larger and her breasts 
beginning to become prominent. This was the cause of 
her dieting. 

Patients like Janet are very resistive to psychiatric help, 
insisting that there is nothing wrong with them. They do 
best when removed from home. Usually they can be 
placed in a boarding home, but sometimes it is necessary 
to send them to a hospital and use insulin. When Janet 
was forced to face the situation as the result of the insulin 
reaction, she developed a hatred for her physician but 
accepted psychiatric help. She then told that she had 
wanted her mother's affection and approval and had re- 
ceived very little of either. She also explained that she 
had often heard her mother complain that menstruation 
was a nuisance and that women had all the inconveniences 

156 



Preadolcscewe 

in life. The little girl had other serious anxieties about sex 
and for a long time insisted that she did not want to know 
anything about "that stuff." She agreed to gain weight, 
however, if she could leave the hospital. For months she 
poured out her resentment against her mother, but finally 
she recognized that her anger was due to a strong desire 
for the mother's approval. 



157 



Chapter Eleven 



Adolescence 

This is a period of rapid growth marked by maturation. 
Growth takes place at markedly variant rates in different 
boys and girls. There are also wide variations in the 
different aspects of growth in the same individual. At this 
period of growth there are physical, intellectual, and emo- 
tional changes. In the process of trying to grow up and 
make an adjustment to society, many important problems 
present themselves. Sex adjustment, independence, wean- 
ing, and inferiority are problems common to all adolescents. 
The seriousness of these and other problems depends upon 
methods that have been used in rearing them up to this age. 
Solution of the problems is essential for mental health. 
Childhood insecurities, anxieties, and resentments add much 
weight to the problems of adolescence. 



ADOLESCENCE is a period of growth second only to 
infancy in the rapidity with which the body develops 
and life patterns manifest themselves. It is notable also 
for marked variations in the rate of growth in different boys 
and girls and the uneven development of the various aspects 
of growth in any one individual. For example, some girls 
begin to menstruate at the age of nine, while others who 
are entirely normal do not reach this stage of physiological 
development until they are nineteen years old. As a rule, 
158 



Adolescence 

emotional maturation parallels this physiological change, 
but that is not always the case. A girl may be physio- 
logically mature and emotionally very immature. Boys 
exhibit the same variations, though perhaps not to so great 
an extent. 

In reference to these various growth patterns, a group of 
adolescents has been compared to a number of girls and 
boys traveling from New York to California. 1 Some may 
go by air, others by rail or sea, and still others on foot. 
Practically all of them will reach their destination, but at 
widely different times. 

The growth changes that occur at adolescence are physi- 
cal, intellectual, and emotional. Physical growth is usually 
very rapid. Boys often grow seven or eight inches in a 
single year. Though they may reach manly stature, how- 
ever, they should not be judged by adult standards. A boy 
or a girl whose chronological age is fourteen may have the 
physical growth of the average sixteen-year-old, the intelli- 
gence of the youth of eighteen, and the emotional develop- 
ment of a child of eleven. How old is such an individual? 
Because of the unevenness of his development, it is impos- 
sible to decide what should be expected of him without 
considering the different aspects of his growth separately 
and determining the developmental level of each. Under 
the circumstances, it is obvious that the youth himself will 
become confused and disturbed about himself. 

Because of their rapid growth, adolescents fatigue easily 
and have poor motor coordination. They find it hard to 
stand on their two feet like proper ladies and gentlemen; 
they have to change position frequently. Often they are 
accused, unjustly, of being lazy. Changes in resistance to 

159 



A Psychology of Growth 

disease occur at adolescence. For example, there is a 
marked decrease in respiratory diseases and a limited 
resistance to tuberculosis; anemias are common. Ado- 
lescents show an increase in surface temperature. The girl 
who says, "I'm not cold," and wants to wear light clothing 
is not following some freakish fashion, as adults often insist. 
She is telling the truth as she understands it; she feels warm. 
In addition to the development of secondary sex character- 
istics, there are frequent changes in the metabolism and 
fluctuations in the physiological aspects of the entire body. 
These characteristics of adolescence are important because 
of the effect that they have upon the individual's mental 
attitudes. 

There is a close relationship between the growth process 
and the glands of internal secretion. In view of the over- 
enthusiasm that sometimes results from the use of glandular 
extracts, especially when they are administered in an effort 
to correct variations in growth at adolescence, it is well to 
note which conditions can and which cannot be treated in 
this manner at the present time. 

A deficiency of the anterior lobe of the pituitary gland 
gives rise to Simmond's disease, a fatal disorder character- 
ized by a general failure of the other endocrine glands, 
particularly the sex glands, the adrenal cortex, the thyroid, 
and the parathyroids. Acromegaly and giantism result 
from overactivity of the anterior pituitary. 

There is no evidence to prove that pituitary insufficiency 
causes retardation in growth, obesity, or menstrual dis- 
turbances. Pituitary dwarfism is a very rare condition. 
Most instances of retardation in growth observed in children 
result from thyroid rather than pituitary insufficiency. 

160 



Adolescence 

Improvement in both physical and mental conditions is 
obtained from the administration of thyroid extract. 

There is no clinical condition due to overactivity of the 
posterior lobe of the pituitary gland. Because diabetes 
insipidus is often associated with destruction of the posterior 
pituitary, the administration of the posterior pituitary sub- 
stance is successful. Many cases of polyuria and poly- 
dipsia seen in practice are psychogenic in origin and can 
be successfully treated by psychotherapy. 

Disorders of the hypothalamus involve many metabolic 
and neuropsychiatric disturbances. The obesity of true 
Frohlich's syndrome (which is an uncommon condition) is 
due to the pressure of an expending lesion on the hypo- 
thalamus. Lesions of the hypothalamus are sometimes asso- 
ciated with peculiar appetites, vasomotor disturbances, and 
high fever. 

The development of precocious puberty in tumors of the 
pineal gland is probably due to pressure on the hypo- 
thalamus. 

Hypothyroidism is common during adolescence and is a 
factor in fatigability, lack of sufficient energy, indifference, 
and lassitude. Changes in the degree of function of this 
gland may be frequent during adolescence. For that 
reason, it is sometimes necessary to repeat metabolic tests 
once or twice a year in order to be accurate in evaluating 
the effect of thyroid disturbances on behavior. 

Hyper- and hypoparathyroidism may produce symptoms 
suggestive of emotional disorders. Medication by which 
these disturbances can be relieved is now available. 

Much use has been made of pituitary and sex hormones 
in treating dysfunction of the sex glands. On the whole, 

161 



A Psychology of Growth 

these substances have been disappointing from a clinical 
point of view, with the exception of chorionic gonadotropin 
in cryptorchidism, where it has a distinct usefulness. The 
male and female sex hormones have also a usefulness as 
substitution therapy in supplying the glandular products 
while the organs themselves are not functioning properly. 
Because of the psychologic effects of glandular therapy, as 
well as the possible harm it may do to the very complex 
endocrine system, it should not be used except after thorough 
examination and the discovery of positive evidence that it 
may prove beneficial. 

Growth changes create many anxieties in the mind of the 
adolescent. He is especially concerned over differences 
between his growth and that of his friends and is often 
frightened by the possibility that there is something the 
matter with himself. These worries may appear neg- 
ligible in the eyes of the adult, who knows that most of them 
are groundless. To the adolescent himself they are just 
as important as he considers them to be, as is shown in the 
following cases. 

Mary was a happy, well-adjusted girl who did good 
schoolwork and was popular with other children until she 
was between eleven and twelve years of age. At that time, 
she began to lose her friends, and the grief she felt was 
reflected in her schoolwork. She also lost favor with her 
teachers, became very unhappy, and cried easily. This 
situation grew increasingly serious over a considerable 
period of years. The cause was obvious. Although 
Mary's growth was rapid, she showed no signs of secondary 
sex characteristics. She did not menstruate until she was 
seventeen years old. During the interval, she looked and 

162 



Adolescence 

acted three or four years younger than her chronological 
age. Her interests were those of a little girl until she was 
more than eighteen, and thus the disparity between her 
immature behavior and the conduct of her contemporaries 
was constantly increased. 

This delayed emotional growth created serious anxieties 
in Mary's mind. She was convinced that there was some- 
thing wrong with herself and attributed her friends' deser- 
tion to that peculiarity. Because she no longer shared the 
interests of her contemporaries, and her behavior seemed 
juvenile lo them, she lost her self-confidence, became con- 
vinced that she was stupid, and was alternately very critical 
of her friends and of herself. These attitudes persisted for 
many years, even though she was told the reason for her 
predicament and every effort was made to restore her self- 
confidence. Indeed, she was not able to understand the 
reason for her maladjustment fully until she finally matured 
and caught up with her group, at about the age of twenty- 
one. 

Analogous problems result from unusually early matura- 
tion. There was Margaret, for example, whose parents 
took her to a physician for examination because of temper 
tantrums and inability to get along with other children. In 
this case, also, the cause of the trouble was clear. Margaret 
had begun to menstruate at the age of nine and a half. By 
the time she was ten and a half, she had the emotional 
growth and interests of a fifteen-year-old. The great dif- 
ference between Margaret and her friends of her own age 
made them and their mothers think that she was peculiar. 
When, for that reason, they avoided her, the child became 
frightened and frustrated. As in the case of Mary, who 

163 



A Psychology of Growth 

matured late, it was necessary for parents and teachers to 
be very patient and understanding in order to minimize 
the child's maladjustment. The treatment of these girls 
necessarily continued a long time until, in each case, the 
patient's level of growth was equal to that of her friends of 
the same age. 

Although similar differences appear among boys, their 
reactions are not usually so severe. Certain dangers, 
however, are inherent in the situation. Because boys are 
hero-worshipers, the one who develops rapidly often be- 
comes the leader of his group. Unless he is stable and 
well adjusted, he may lead the group into difficulties. The 
immature boy, on the other hand, is easily led and will 
do many things, even some that he knows are wrong, if he 
thinks he will thereby win the esteem of the leaders of his 
gang. One such boy stole many articles and was finally 
caught breaking into a store to get baseballs and athletic 
equipment. He hoped by this conduct to appear tough 
in the eyes of his more mature friends. The penalty for 
refusing to do what the gang wished was being called a sissy 
and ostracized from the group. 

Although there are no abrupt changes in intelligence 
growth during the period of adolescence, certain lines of 
development may regularly be expected. One evidence of 
mental growth is the appearance of the ability to do abstract 
thinking, which begins at the age of twelve. This is an 
important development, in view of the fact that the norms 
of society are abstract and the gradual understanding of 
them is a vital factor in the adjustment of the child to his 
environment, as stated on page 65. As a test of the twelve- 
year-old's ability to understand abstract terms, one might 

164 



Adolescence 

ask the questions: What is pity? What are envy, revenge, 
charity, justice? From the point of view of the adult 
these terms are so simple that parents are not always likely 
to realize that they have no meaning for a child until he has 
a mental age of twelve years. Even when a child has the 
intelligence growth to comprehend abstract terms, they 
do not concern him until he develops a social consciousness. 
This occurs with the emotional growth of maturation. All 
his life he has heard about the concepts of truthfulness, right, 
and wrong, and has been expected to respect them; but it 
is not until adolescence that he begins fully to appreciate 
their implications and to comprehend the standards by 
which he has always been supposed to live. 

The most marked changes take place in the emotional 
aspect of growth. This is shown particularly in the increase 
of conscience at the approach of adolescence and during 
that period. Although the still, small voice begins to 
whisper to a child at a very early age late infancy or even 
before it becomes much stronger and more insistent in 
the preadolescent and adolescent boy and girl. 

Idealism is stronger during adolescence than at any other 
time in the life of the individual. It may serve the child 
as a valuable guide in working out his own problems. 
With proper cooperation, it can be used to develop social 
and religious concepts and to help the youngster achieve 
the necessary feeling that he has a place of some importance 
in society. 

At adolescence, for the first time, children see themselves 
as others see them. Motivated by sex attraction, they 
become acutely conscious of the impressions that they make 
on others. For this reason, their behavior is often para* 

165 



A Psychology of Growth 

doxical. A boy wants a good suit of clothes in place of his 
old pants and sweater; the girl wants lipstick and nail 
polish. Given their own way, they dress in the most 
extreme fashion and affect a highly sophisticated manner 
but only for a few hours, or, at most, a day or two at a time. 
Following such a performance they go to the other extreme 
wear their oldest clothes, perhaps, refuse to keep them- 
selves clean, and try to appear absolutely indifferent to 
anyone's opinion. In other words, they alternate between 
very grown-up and very childish behavior. The reason is 
obvious: they try to act grown up and find the task too 
difficult. It takes many years before they can act grown 
up all the time. Meanwhile, because of the difficulties 
they encounter and the disappointments they suffer by 
reason of their failures, they throw temper tantrums, are 
moody and unhappy, and become a trial to their parents 
and to others with whom they live. 

Biologically, adolescence is characterized by maturation; 
that is, the development of strong sex impulses and sex 
attraction. Previously the child was interested only in 
himself. In his own mind he was almighty, the one indi- 
vidual in the world. With maturation, however, comes 
deflation, and he realizes that he is only one of the multi- 
tudinous individuals in the world. Now it becomes neces- 
sary for him to recognize the demands of the social system, 
and he begins to try too many problems in his mind. These 
must be satisfactorily solved if he is to become a well- 
adjusted adult. The seriousness of the problems is deter- 
mined by the way in which he has been brought up. If his 
growth has been normal up to this point, it will continue 
with a minimum of difficulties; if it has not been normal, 

166 



Adolescence 

the difficulties will be proportionate to his maladjustment. 
Boys and girls bring to adolescence the confidence or in- 
security, the self-reliance or need for help that they have 
acquired during childhood. These qualities have a 
strongly determining influence on their ability to solve 
the inevitable problems that confront the near-adults. 

There is, to be sure, a difference between inherent and 
acquired problems. For example, the girl who does not 
begin to menstruate until she is eighteen is emotionally 
immature for a physiological reason. This condition is not 
at all the same as the emotional immaturity of the youngster 
who has found growing up too difficult and, therefore, has 
a distorted growth or has regressed to a more immature 
but more comfortable level. 

Four major problems trouble the minds of all adolescent 
boys and girls. In our civilization, one of the foremost 
of these is sex, for the reason that the adolescent is caught 
in a tug of war between his own developing sex impulses and 
the demand of society that they be controlled. Whether 
or not the child can cope with this situation depends upon 
the knowledge that he has acquired. The child who has 
been properly taught and is not frightened by sex will 
welcome his maturation and get the greatest satisfaction 
from love. Conversely, there will be conflicts, doubts, and 
unhappiness in the mind of that child who has been given 
the idea that sex is wrong and sinful, that normal sex 
interests and habits are bad, or that they will make him 
ill or affect his mind. The girl who has grown up normally 
and understands about menstruation is thrilled by the onset 
of this process. The frightened girl may experience great 
distress during her first menstrual period and have similar 

167 - 



A Psychology of Growth 

difficulty for the remainder of her life. Analyses have 
shown that much of the discomfort of the menstrual period 
is psychological rather than physical. 

This fact is illustrated by a thirty-year-old woman who 
complained of severe menstrual pains. When her history 
was taken, she told that she had known nothing about 
menstruation until her first period occurred. While she 
was visiting an aunt, she awoke one night to find herself 
"smeared with blood." This caused her to fear that some- 
thing was seriously wrong and that she might die. Afraid 
to disturb her aunt to ask for advice, she washed herself 
with cold water. In the morning she talked to the aunt, 
who said, "That was the very worst thing you could have 
done. Now you'll have cramps for the rest of your life." 
Although she had no pain with the first period, she fulfilled 
her aunt's prediction and had "terrible cramps" every 
month thereafter. Repeated gynecological examinations 
were negative; but only after prolonged psychiatric treat- 
ment did the patient realize that the cramps were due to the 
dread of painful menstrual periods. With a slowly chang- 
ing mental attitude, the cramps almost entirely disappeared. 
' Thus there is a great need for intelligent sex education. 
This should have begun much earlier. In fact, as we 
have seen, the starting point should have been the attitude 
of the parents and their instruction of the child from his 
earliest infancy; but whether or not the child has had the 
benefit of a healthy attitude on the part of his parents and 
adequate sex education all along the way, he is still in need 
of intelligent answers to the questions that arise as the result 
of his own growth problems. Nurses are frequently con- 
sulted about these matters, and they should be prepared to 

168 - 



Adolescence 

discuss them intelligently. In order to do this a nurse 
must first examine her own prejudices and difficulties and, 
if necessary, correct her own attitude. She can obtain 
much help from good books on sex education. Many works 
on the subject have been published during the past ten or 
fifteen years. A list will be appended at the end of this 
chapter. 

The second problem in the minds of all adolescents has to 
do with independence. As they mature physically, chil- 
dren like to feel that they are grown up in other ways. 
"I'm going to do as I please," the adolescent tells his 
parents. "You can't make me do anything." That is an 
entirely normal expression of the child's feelings and almost 
an exact statement of fact. Whether parents like it or not, 
those who are intelligent realize that they cannot force the 
adolescent to do any of the things that they consider most 
important to go through school, for example, and to keep 
out of serious difficulties outside the home. If they have 
permitted the child to grow up normally, however, he has 
developed sufficient self-reliance to avoid real trouble and 
they have no need to fear the consequences of his declaration 
of independence. As a matter of fact, they have given 
this child increasing independence since his infancy; by the 
time he demands freedom of action at adolescence, he 
already possesses it. Such parents can have confidence in 
the child's judgment and must have learned that he is 
capable of taking care of himself up to a point that he 
knows better than anyone else. 

In spite of his demand for independence, the adolescent 
knows that he needs help in solving many of the important 
problems that confront him. Although he wants inde- 

169 - 



A Psychology of Growth 

pendence, he is still dependent upon his parents and upon 
other adults. As a matter of fact, the more indirectly he 
asserts his independence, the more certain it is that he is 
fighting his own desire for dependence. When his inde- 
pendence is respected and he can, therefore, have confidence 
in adults, he goes to them with his sex problems; his social, 
vocational, religious, and physical problems; and the endless 
number of questions evoked by the whole business of grow- 
ing up and making adjustments to society. This is a field 
in which the nurse and the physician can be very helpful. 
They are consulted frequently, but not nearly so frequently 
as they should be. 

Usually the struggle between independence and depend- 
ence continues through adolescence and adulthood. While 
the individual desires independence, he also wants to be 
loved, which is dependence. At times, his independence 
costs him dearly in terms of frustration, criticism, loss of 
jobs, and disharmony in the home. These reactions indi- 
cate that the parents did not give the individual security 
during his childhood and that he never enjoyed that feeling 
of approval which makes for self-confidence and the willing- 
ness to accept help from others. 

L. R., a man twenty-four years old, was one of these 
individuals. Trouble began shortly after his marriage, 
when he insisted upon dominating his wife and, rather than 
accept her reasonable suggestions, often did things in ways 
that he admitted were not efficient. "If I want to do 
something," he said, "I'm going to do it. In my own 
home I'm going to have my own way." When he was 
asked if he did not feel like a small boy when he made 
such statements, he admitted that this was true. "But," 

170 - 



Adolescence 

he said, "I was never allowed to do anything in my parents 5 
home and now that I've got a home of my own Pm not 
going to let that kind of thing get started." 

In elaborating on this statement about his childhood, he 
described a home in which his father had little authority 
and his mother dominated the family. She had forced her 
ideas upon the boy and set up rigid standards, without 
giving him credit for doing anything right. The mother 
selected the boy's clothes, failed to give him the spending 
money that the family could well afford, refused to allow 
him to play football, punished him if he fought, and kept 
him in the house if he did not get the highest grades in 
school. At the age of fifteen, he ran away from home and 
went to live with an uncle in another city. As punishment, 
the mother obliged him to stay there for a year. Although 
he had never before admitted the fact to anyone, he con- 
fessed to the physician who questioned him that during the 
year away from home he had been very homesick. These 
disclosures showed that the boy had been extremely depend- 
ent on his mother. He had tried hard to please her but, 
because she never approved of what he did, he had become 
resentful. When he reached adolescence, he determined 
not to be dominated by anyone and, although he fell in 
love and was married, he could not tolerate the idea of being 
dependent in any way on his wife. His home, he thought, 
must be different from that of his parents. 

Betty was another child who never received any praise 
from her mother. On the contrary, she was unwanted, 
unloved the object of constant criticism. Not surpris- 
ingly, she became a behavior problem. When she refused 
to be "broken," the mother beat her severely, and Betty 

171 . 



A Psychology of Growth 

fought back by refusing to do anything unless she was 
forced. At the age of twenty-two, she began to have pain 
when she was away from home. She also, complained of 
shortness of breath and nausea and had a dread of becom- 
ing ill and vomiting in public. When she analyzed this 
fear, she found that she dreaded being sick in public for 
the reason that it might cause people to be sorry for her and 
she didn't want sympathy from anyone. She said that 
she wanted to be independent of everyone. Actually this 
girl was very insecure. Because she felt a great resentment 
toward the mother who never accepted or approved of her, 
she tried to convince herself that she could live without 
even sympathy from anyone. 

Although the reactions of these two persons may appear 
to be extreme, they are not uncommon. Many individuals 
have similar, if less severe, reactions. 

An important problem of the adolescent, then, concerns 
the use to which he is going to put his independence, once 
he has obtained it. Many individuals use it unwisely and 
soon get into trouble. Usually the cause is not hard to 
find. Youngsters who make serious mistakes are likely to 
be those who for years were tied to mother's apron strings or 
kept under father's fists, or both. Since they were not 
permitted gradually to take on responsibilities proportion- 
ate to their age and abilities, they never developed that self- 
confidence which comes from learning how to do things; 
they never became self-reliant. When they acquired inde- 
pendence, they did not know what to do with it. 

When adolescents go to adults for "advice," what they 
really want is a good listener, someone in whom they have 
confidence and to whom they can talk freely about their 

172 . 



Adolescence 

problems. The nurse and the physician, in this role of 
counselor, can supply medical facts (being sure of their 
information, of course, before passing it on); but they can 
render even greater service by lending their ears, rather 
than by giving their opinions. Though they may be able 
to make some suggestions, their most valuable help comes 
from permitting the patient to find the answers to his own 
questions and from giving him only the backing that he 
needs to translate his ideas into action. 

The third problem of the adolescent has to do with 
weaning. This process of becoming weaned from parents 
is usually difficult and, in many cases, is never completed, 
even in adulthood. Continued dependence on parents 
may be the cause of many maladjustments, since a hetero- 
sexual development is essential for success in life; that is, 
every child must transfer his affection from his parents 
(particularly the mother, in the case of the boy, and the 
father, in the girl's case) to someone outside the family. 

There are many reasons why boys and girls never become 
emancipated from their parents. One is the insecurity that 
results when apprehensive parents keep a child dependent 
and refuse to allow him to grow up and take care of himself. 
The youth who lacks security is always frightened; he often 
believes the familiar adage, "Mother knows best," and the 
crippling corollary, "I know very little." 

The situation is illustrated by the case of Janice. She 
entered nurse's training at the age of eighteen and, although 
she was physically well and possessed high intelligence, 
she was painfully homesick for many months and had great 
difficulty with her work, both practical and academic. 
Always apprehensive, she was so fearful of making a mistake 

173 



A Psychology of Growth 

that she did her work very slowly, used no initiative, never 
recited or volunteered opinions. As a result, she was not 
asked to participate in the activities of the other girls and 
became a thoroughly maladjusted student nurse. 

The story behind this story begins with a very strict, 
neurotic mother, against whom Janice, unfortunately, 
never rebelled. All through high school the girl conformed 
absolutely to her mother's ideas. She never had friends who 
did not meet the mother's approval, always wore the clothes 
that her mother selected, always came home at exactly the 
time her mother set, and altogether followed her mother's 
wishes to the most minute detail. The father supported 
his wife's ideas, but obviously had little to say about domes- 
tic matters. Janice was greatly attached to him, always 
used him as a standard by which to measure the boys she 
knew, and was afraid to marry lest her husband should not 
turn out to be like her father. 

Coupled with her dependence and apprehension, Janice 
felt extreme resentment toward her mother, although she 
was too frightened to admit that fact even to herself. When 
she left home to go into the hospital, where she was expected 
to act and think for herself, the girl was lost. This type 
of problem, which is very common among student nurses, 
is more prevalent among girls than among boys. 

Like Janice, many adolescents compare others with their 
own parents. That is entirely normal, but if a boy or a 
girl expects to marry someone who acts and thinks like 
his or her mother or father, many difficulties may result. 
Serious weaning problems occur in cases of extreme attach- 
ment to parents. There is, for example, the very honest, 
obedient, clean, polite ten-year-old boy who washes his ears, 

174 



Adolescence 

combs his hair, wears a blue-serge suit, takes his mother's 
arm, tips his hat and says "How do you do?" He is at 
once too greatly attached to his mother and too frightened 
to do the things that normal boys enjoy. He is heading 
for serious trouble when, at adolescence, his sex impulses 
become very strong and sex wishes develop. These wishes 
will then be directed toward that member of the opposite 
sex of whom he thinks the most in this case, of course, the 
mother. He may then continue to be very strait-laced and 
proper, or he may break into open rebellion. His out- 
breaks of temper are likely to reach alarming proportions, 
because at adolescence a child is often violent. Parents 
should be helped to understand the reason for this rebellion 
and to recognize it as a necessary part of the child's develop- 
ment. If he does not rebel, he is in danger of never becom- 
ing weaned at all. When interviewed, children of this 
kind express hatred of their parents in direct proportion to 
their attachment. 

Parents normally want to keep a child as long as possible. 
In order to force them to realize that he is grown up and 
determined to make decisions for himself, the adolescent 
must rebel and treat his parents in a way that they consider 
unkind. There is much truth in the old adage that the 
boy who is not mean to his mother during adolescence will 
be mean to his wife. 

Probably the most common reason for the complaints of 
wives and husbands is that each criticizes the other for not 
behaving like mother or like father. The words of the 
old song, "I Want a Girl Just Like the Girl Who Married 
Dear Old Dad," are a popular expression of a profound 
psychological truth. In the case of that individual who 

175 - 



A Psychology of Growth 

has never been weaned, this tendency to compare his wife 
to his mother results in harsh criticism if the young woman 
does not think, talk, dress, or keep house just as his mother 
did. Similarly the wife may bring great unhappiness upon 
herself and her husband if she expects him to be the counter- 
part of her father. Many such adult problems stem from 
adolescent difficulties. 

The fourth serious problem in the life of the adolescent 
has to do with his feelings of inadequacy and inferiority. 
These feelings, of course, do not suddenly spring into being 
with the approach of adolescence, but are the product of 
improper training through all the preceding years. Chil- 
dren may be told from fifty to one hundred twenty-five 
times a day that they are bad and of no account without 
it having any apparent effects at the time. Often the 
results do not manifest themselves until the child has 
reached preadolescence or adolescence itself; that is, until 
he has arrived at that stage in his mental growth when he 
becomes acutely conscious of others. Then the damage 
that has been done produces behavior that is shocking to 
the adults who unwittingly caused it. 
. Such was the case with Nancy. She was a very intelli- 
gent and attractive child. Her parents unquestionably 
wanted her and approved of her, in general, but they set 
up impossible standards of behavior for her. From their 
ministerial ancestors they had received the idea that it is 
extremely important to teach a child complete obedience 
and consideration for others. They succeeded with Nancy 
until she was nine and a half years old. At least, up to that 
time she was very obedient and quiet; then, suddenly, she 
began to have temper tantrums. When a physician who 
had obtained her confidence asked why she became angry, 

176 



Adolescence 

she replied, "Because I hate myself." She felt that she 
was thoroughly bad and gave two principal reasons for that 
conviction: disobedience and disrespect. 

Many boys and girls in high school have the same feeling 
about themselves and react in a similar manner. 

The individual who feels inferior responds in one of two 
ways. Either he turns into a quiet, shut-in, a social or anti- 
social person, who is very unhappy and develops many 
resentments, or else he becomes aggressive, egocentric, all- 
knowing. There is, of course, no such thing as a superiority 
complex. Those unfortunates who give the impression 
that they consider themselves superior are only covering 
up their feelings of inferiority. 

The minds of all adolescents are disturbed by the four 
problems: sexual adjustment, independence (and its corol- 
lary, dependence), weaning, and the inferiority complex. 
These perplexities vary in degree with the development of 
each individual from birth and with his training during 
childhood, especially as it was affected by the attitudes of 
parents, teachers, church leaders, and others concerned 
with the guidance of children. 

In addition to these universal problems, the adolescent 
must cope with his individual difficulties, those anxieties 
which have resulted from frustrations in infancy and those 
other fears which he has acquired along the way. He must 
now, furthermore, face the necessity for accepting his own 
innate characteristics and those environmental circum- 
stances which are unavoidable. He must learn how to live 
with himself and with those external conditions over which 
he has no control, however rebellious he may feel about 
them. 

Richard has to accept his delayed or slow development; 

177 



A Psychology of Growth 

George must reconcile himself to the probability that he 
will never be tall; Mary has to face the fact that she is less 
attractive than Susan; and Elizabeth, the knowledge that 
she has poor motor coordination and no athletic ability. 
Jack learns that he can never be a star football player and 
Elsie finds that she is not a good actress. Adolescents are 
much concerned about their growth and physical character- 
istics. Failure to reach some desired goal creates a serious 
problem. 

In the matter of intellectual and emotional characteris- 
tics, adolescents have to face the same irrevocable truths 
and learn to accept themselves as they are. Some have 
special abilities and others have special defects. Some do 
well in academic pursuits and others fail. The latter group 
not only suffers disappointment but has to endure the scorn 
of teachers and sometimes of parents. It is unfortunate 
that during this period of rapid growth, when mental 
efficiency may be low, adolescents are often faced with a 
school curriculum that is most difficult. The struggle for 
grades that will be acceptable to colleges, together with 
strong individual competition, is a tax even on those who 
do not have suppressed and exhausting fears and serious 
problems of adjustment. Innumerable individual charac- 
teristics contribute to the problem of making an adjustment 
in society. Some of them are in the mind of each adolescent 
and the anxieties that they create are great or small, depend- 
ing on the patterns of response that the individual has 
developed. 

In the process of growing up, it is essential for each child 
to feel that there is something that he can do well and that 
there is some small niche in society for him. The security 

178 - 



Adolescence 

that he originally found in his parents and later in his school 
is now enlarged to include the community, and finally rests 
in himself. If he is to make a satisfactory adjustment, he 
must have self-confidence and faith in his own ability to 
meet new situations. 

Mental growth is the measure of mental health in 
adolescence, as it is at any age. By the time that a boy 
(or a girl) reaches adolescence, he should have developed 
much self-confidence and, as a result, the ability to take 
the responsibility for his own conduct. He should be 
responsible for his health habits and should be vitally con- 
cerned about his physical development. He should be 
responsible for his schoolwork, having begun to take on 
that responsibility in the first grade. He should be able 
to continue his socialization, and that process will not be 
too difficult if he learned to play well with other boys and 
girls during childhood. Now, as his contacts become wider, 
he should know how to conduct himself in many social 
situations; he should be responsible for getting home at a 
reasonable hour (which is not necessarily the time set by 
his parents), and should be able to avoid serious difficulties. 
Parents can no longer supervise his social activities. If 
they are wise, they have no wish to do so; if they have 
brought the child up well, there is no need for the supervision. 

The adolescent's social concepts and his attitudes toward 
society are shaped by the current political philosophy of the 
country in which he lives, the doctrines of the church in 
which he was reared, and the standards of his home and 
his community. Like the adult, the adolescent wants to 
believe that he solves his problems by logical thinking and, 
indeed, he makes a great effort to do so. Actually he 

179 



A Psychology of Growth 

devotes much time to an attempt to justify the prejudices 
and ideas that have been handed down to him and to make 
a comfortable adjustment to society. If he has been 
brought up to be a "strong Republican Methodist," for 
example, he may argue fervently to convince others that 
his is the one true philosophy; but the more argumentative 
he becomes, the more he shows himself to be uncertain 
in his own mind. Should he be unable to convince him- 
self of the truth of the concepts that his family has given 
him, he may rebel and try to prove that his parents and 
society are wrong and, perhaps, proclaim himself an atheist 
mnd a communist. This struggle, which begins in ado- 
lescence and continues throughout life, shows the effect of 
the social-political concepts upon the individual and the 
effect of the individual upon these concepts. 

The rapid development of the adolescent often causes 
trouble in school, particularly at the secondary level. 
High-school boys and girls are sometimes overwhelmed by 
very strong sex feelings and are likely to have difficulty with 
the frustrated teacher who objects to behavior that results 
from this development. With the adolescent's rapid physi- 
ological or physical growth there are unquestionably in- 
creased hormone secretions, and this change causes him to 
become inattentive and, therefore, to do poor schoolwork. 
Some boys and girls are unable to study thirty minutes 
a day. 

During the past twenty years, educators have given much 
thought to the matter of curriculums for adolescents. As 
children grow older and individual intellectual capacities 
manifest themselves, there should be ample provision for 
developing these. Some youngsters who have high intelli- 

180 



Adolescence 

gence, however, do not know how they want to use it; 
others may have outstanding mechanical aptitude and no 
capacity for academic pursuits; while still others will never 
be able to follow any rigid school program. A high school, 
therefore, needs a very broad curriculum, in order to keep 
its requirements within the abilities of all its students and 
thus develop their self-confidence and gradually replace 
the security given by their parents with the confidence in 
themselves that is essential to adults. 

Some children make this adjustment very successfully, 
others succeed temporarily, and all too many fail altogether. 
The last mentioned are those individuals who are unable 
to grow up and take on the responsibilities that society sets 
up for the young adult. They respond to this maladjust- 
ment in two ways by showing open rebellion or by de- 
veloping neurotic manifestations and taking refuge in 
illness. Those who rebel either refuse to do anything; that 
is, they adopt a passive aggressive attitude, or else they 
become openly aggressive and destructive. The latter 
group makes up that large number of mentally ill youngsters 
commonly designated as juvenile delinquents. The other 
group is composed of those boys and girls who, hampered 
by childhood insecurities and confronted with standards 
that they were unable to meet, became emotionally dis- 
turbed and acquired the many somatic complaints seen in 
neurosis. They are very sensitive, apprehensive, uncertain, 
and immature. Few studies have been made of this neu- 
rotic group. 

The following cases illustrate some of the complicated 
problems of the adolescent. 

Maxine was a large, not especially attractive girl. She 

181 - 



A Psychology oj Growth 

was eighteen and a half years old when she left college at the 
end of her first year because she was not pledged to a 
sorority, had failed in two subjects, and barely passed two 
others. She complained that she could not sleep or study 
and that she had abdominal distress and, two or three times 
a month, colitis. These attacks, which lasted one or two 
days, occurred before examinations and at those times when 
the girl was invited to a sorority house. When she de- 
scribed her symptoms in detail, Maxine said that she 
"trembled inside." Her I.Q. was 130 and she had received 
high grades in secondary school, even though she was 
nervous. 

This girl had been adopted at the age of two months. 
Her mother was quiet and unresponsive; her father, a 
preoccupied businessman, was critical of the child and 
caused her to be afraid of him. Both parents insisted, 
not altogether convincingly, that they had wanted a baby, 
but admitted that they had never been close to Maxine. 
She had heard her grandmother boast many times that it 
was she who had selected the baby. From the time that 
the girl was ten years old, therefore, she had been afraid 
that her parents did not love her. The mother was socially 
ambitious for Maxine and expected her to live up to high 
standards. She, however, felt that she was inferior and 
bad, although such was not the case and her parents were 
proud of her attainments in high school. During her 
adolescence she wanted independence but was afraid to 
assert herself until her last year in high school. Then, she 
said, she "nearly always lost the argument." When she 
was tempted to use her own judgment, she was afraid of 
being wrong and ended by following her mother's advice. 

182 



Adolescence 

Maxine matured at the age of twelve. She liked boys 
and they were attracted to her, although she always felt 
that she was not good looking. She recognized sex wishes, 
but thought that they were bad and that a nice girl should 
not have them. 

When she went to college, she was frightened and very 
insecure. She felt inferior to the sorority girls, was afraid 
that they would not like her and that, if they did accept 
her, she would not be able to make high enough grades for 
admission. Soon after her arrival she was befriended by 
an upperclassman who, she found later, was a homosexual. 
Since she had never before been permitted to make deci- 
sions, she was always afraid that she would do or say some- 
thing wrong. In time, she was pledged to the sorority that 
was her third choice, but poor grades prevented her from 
joining. The serious problems in the mind of this insecure 
girl were enough to prevent her from studying properly or 
making an adjustment. 

Other adolescent difficulties entered into the case of 
George who, at the age of nineteen, was discharged from 
the army as a neuropsychiatric. After one year in the 
service, he had forty-two charges against him and was 
referred to a psychiatrist. 

Study of this problem showed that George's background 
included three years of military training in high school and 
a good academic record. When he entered the army, he 
was eager to make good and had high hopes for promotion. 
As months went by and promotions were not forthcoming, 
however, he developed an attitude of indifference. Al- 
though he never disobeyed orders, he was frequently late 
at formations, drilled in a slovenly manner, and failed to 

183 - 



A Psychology of Growth 

follow individual assignments accurately or even to make 
an effort to do so. During this time he slept badly, lost 
weight, had crying spells, and became a problem in his 
command. 

When the psychiatrist asked George for his own explana- 
tion of his trouble, he said that he presumed that he was 
frightened and "couldn't take it." What he meant was 
that the idea of war was in conflict with all his ideals. 
The thought of hurting or killing was repugnant to him and 
he felt that war was a terrible thing. In high school he had 
taken military training because he liked the uniform, and 
a wise drillmaster told him that he was one of his best 
students. 

George was the older of two brothers. He had wet the 
bed up to the time he was five years old, but had presented 
no discipline problems at home or in school. His parents 
brought him up very carefully, stressing kindness and con- 
sideration for others, and he was always a good boy. He 
never stole, used bad words, or disobeyed; and when he 
reached adolescence he became very idealistic. He was 
fairly popular and did better than the average in sports. 

- In his own opinion, however, George was always inferior 
to other boys, owing, in part, to the fact that he was small. 
By following his friends' lead, never crying or fighting, he 
established a reputation for being amiable, a good sport, 
and a thoroughly nice boy; but inside he was seething with 
inferiority and resentment. Another element in the situa- 
tion was George's fear of his father. Although he was never 
punished, he knew that he had to do as, he was told and 
obeyed without question. 

In the army, George's failure to win promotion had less 

184 . 



Adolescence 

effect upon him than his reaction to the philosophy of war, 
which, he realized, was diametrically opposed to all the 
teachings of his childhood. His ideals were shattered and 
he became indifferent, frightened, and depressed. 

George and Maxine are examples of adolescents who were 
able to succeed in high school, in spite of the conditions 
that later caused serious difficulties. Others break, during 
the high-school period, when they rebel, develop serious 
anxiety states, or fail completely, and often slip into that 
large group of boys and girls known as juvenile delinquents. 

REFERENCE 

1. FRANK, LAWRENCE K., Journal of Pediatrics, vol. 19, April, 
1941. 



185 



Chapter Twelve 



Juvenile Delinquents 

The term "juvenile delinquents" is applied to those 
youngsters who are in conflict with the law. The term is 
general and includes many types of problems. Many 
environmental conditions have been blamed for delinquency, 
usually on a basis of statistical findings. The greatest 
progress in understanding delinquency has come from the 
study of individual delinquents. These individuals are 
usually mentally ill. The important practical question is 
whether they can be cured by combined psychiatric and 
social treatment. 



JUVENILE delinquency is a general term applied to pre- 
adolescent and adolescent boys and girls whose behavior 
is in conflict with the law and causes them to become 
court problems. 

In the English-speaking countries the subject of juvenile 
delinquency had been investigated seriously since the early 
part of the seventeenth century. English investigators who 
wrote the "Report of the Committee for Investigating the 
Causes of the Alarming Increase of Juvenile Delinquency 
in the Metropolis 55 * concluded that the principal causes 
were "the improper conduct of parents; the want of edu- 
cation; the want of suitable management; the violation of 
the Sabbath and habits of gambling in public streets." 
186 



Juvenile Delinquents 

The intervening years have brought many other investi- 
gations, but the majority of them, like the first one, have 
been statistical studies, from which it is always difficult to 
draw reliable conclusions. Some studies have convinced 
the investigators that juvenile delinquency is the result of 
environment; others, that it is due to an incurable con- 
stitutional condition, that is, a defect or defects in each 
individual delinquent from birth. These conclusions have 
been affected by the fact that most serious cases of juvenile 
delinquency that have come into court have not been 
treated successfully, and the offenders have had to be placed 
in custodial institutions. Like any condition in medicine 
that does not yield to treatment, this had evoked many 
diverse theories in regard to the cause and the method of 
management. 

Many studies of large numbers of delinquents have 
refuted the old idea that juvenile delinquency was inherited. 
Spaulding and Healy's 2 study of several hundred cases in 
Chicago failed to produce any evidence to show that it was 
hereditary in nature, although they did conclude that some 
children inherited physical or mental traits that might, 
under special circumstances, become causative factors. 

Goring 3 claimed that mental retardation was more fre- 
quent in the criminal class than in the population as a 
whole; but he based his conclusions on physicians' clinical 
diagnoses, which are inaccurate. Using army intelligence 
tests, Murchinson 4 and others have demonstrated that the 
intelligence of the prison population is as high as that of 
the general population. In other words, according to these 
figures, the percentage of persons of superior intelligence 
is as high in prisons as elsewhere and the percentage of 

187 



A Psychology of Growth 

prisoners with low intelligence is no greater than in the 
general population. Italian criminologists attempted to 
prove that juvenile offenders were victims of abnormalities 
in the glands of internal secretion. Kretchmer 5 and other 
Europeans tried to relate behavior to body build and 
physical types. Neither of these hypotheses, however, has 
been proved. 

In most analyses of the environmental factors that might 
produce juvenile delinquency, the broken home is given 
first place. Shaw and McKay, 6 who made one of the 
most careful studies, however, found that the ratio of broken 
homes among juvenile delinquents to that among other 
school children was 1.18 to 1. They concluded that 
delinquency was less closely related to the formal break 
in the home than to internal discord and conflict in the 
family; and most psychiatrists agree with this conclusion if 
parental rejection is added. 

Investigators have made statistical studies of many other 
possible factors, such as sibling position (chronological 
position of the child in relation to brothers and sisters), 
undesirable persons living in the same house, companions, 
economic status of the family, religious influence, type of 
community, urban and rural differences, regional dif- 
ferences, inflation and depression, and many others. Al- 
though all these factors throw statistical light on the prob- 
lem, no one and no combination of them can satisfactorily 
explain the cause of the behavior in individual cases. Two 
publications that give a detailed report on our present 
knowledge of these and other factors are "The Etiology of 
Delinquency and Criminal Behavior," by \Valter G. Reck- 
less, 7 and "Young Offenders, An Enquiry into Juvenile 

188 



Juvenile Delinquents 

Delinquency," by A. M. Carr-Saunders, Hermann Man- 
heim, and E. C. Rhodes. 8 

When juvenile delinquency is regarded as the inability 
to make an adjustment to society, its seriousness is relative. 
For example, in many neighborhoods, stealing and truancy 
are normal. There the boy who steals enjoys the respect 
of his fellows, while the lad who never breaks the law is the 
one who becomes declasse. If extensive stealing is the 
custom of the neighborhood, the average boy will steal, 
since the desire to do so, which is normal in all children, is 
now augmented by the natural reluctance of a young person 
to defy custom and behave in a manner that sets him apart 
from others. Some children, too, are very susceptible to 
the influence of vicious or criminal elements in the home or 
the neighborhood. The effects of suggestion and social 
pressure are shown by the fact that most delinquents do 
not work alone. The greatest number of delinquents may 
be found in the areas showing the greatest disorganization; 
that is, neighborhoods where there are industrial plants, 
condemned buildings, a declining population. This does 
not mean, however, that the environment per se is the cause 
of the delinquencies. Individuals who live in these areas are 
less capable of rearing children successfully and, therefore, 
their boys and girls are more likely to encounter difficulties. 

The first careful studies of individual cases of juvenile 
delinquency were begun by Dr. William Healy when he 
organized the Juvenile Psychopathic Institute in Chicago 
in 1908. Since that time a large number of child-guidance 
clinics and independent psychiatrists have studied the 
individual delinquent. 

Study of individual cases shows first of all that "delin- 

189 - 



A Psychology of Growth 

quency" is a very general term one that includes many 
different forms of behavior. There are mentally retarded, 
psychopathic, and sex delinquents; individuals whose 
actions are due to compulsive behavior, to encephalitis, or 
other forms of brain disease; and numerous other types of 
delinquents. Persons who have studied individual cases 
have generally concluded that they cannot be explained by 
general theories. 

Work with juvenile delinquents indicates that these are 
youngsters who are emotionally disturbed. The primary 
causes of their delinquency are their reactions to the stresses 
and strains in their own minds, and these may be generated 
anywhere in the city or in the country, on the boulevards 
or in the slums, where discipline is strict or where it is lax, 
in homes that have a strong church affiliation or in those 
that have none at all. These and other general social 
factors do not in themselves account for desirable or deplor- 
able behavior of any kind, and juvenile delinquency is no 
exception. 

When we find a youth defying his parents and the laws 
of his community to the point of committing acts that he 
knows are prohibited, we are dealing with desperate 
behavior, which must be motivated by serious emotional 
difficulties. In his aggressive behavior the boy is expressing 
some inner driving force that he himself neither under- 
stands nor finds himself able to control. 

For example, there was Edward, a fifteen-year-old boy 
who was arrested for exposing himself to girls. He came 
from a fine family in a good community and had been care- 
fully brought up, as that expression is generally understood. 
He was unable to give any reason for his behavior. He not 

190 



Juvenile Delinquents 

only asserted that he had no interest in sex but also that he 
believed sex wishes were wrong and that he attempted 
desperately to force all such ideas out of his mind. This 
extreme effort to dismiss normal feelings, which were 
physiological in character and instinctive in nature, caused 
him to develop a compulsion to the point where he could 
not help exposing himself. Questioning revealed that this 
boy had failed to receive intelligent sex instructions, but 
had been taught all his life that everything about the subject 
was wicked. With intelligent sex education and conse- 
quent relief from impossible standards, his compulsion 
disappeared. 

Seventeen-year-old Irene was charged with sex delin- 
quencies, which had been continuing for a year. She was 
an only child, who had been adopted at the age of nine 
months. Her parents, like those of the boy in the previous 
case, were fine people who lived in a good neighborhood. 
However, they had many disagreements, in the course of 
which they used the child as a football. As she never 
knew whether or not she was approved, she felt very in- 
secure. At about the age of ten, she became something of 
a social outcast. She had very few friends among girls of 
her own age and said that she preferred older women. 
Actually she was very dependent upon her mother but, 
because she was not sure of her position in the family, she 
was searching for a good mother substitute. The girl's 
parents brought her up very strictly and, on the subject of 
sex, she was more frightened than enlightened. She 
described spells when she had very strong sex wishes 
accompanied by an overwhelming sense of loneliness. At 
those times she felt that she had to get out of the house and 

191 



A ^Psychology of Growth 

would go off with the first boy she met on the street. After 
each episode she experienced an extreme sense of guilt and 
felt that she should be severely punished. 

In these two examples we find a boy and a girl whose 
homes, parents, and environment as a whole would gen- 
erally be classed as very desirable. Nevertheless, they 
developed compulsive behavior that led both young people 
to the juvenile court. Superficially their behavior might 
appear to be very immature, the result of a lack of self- 
restraint; or they might be described as indifferent to the 
rules of society. A study of the two children, however, 
disproves both of these explanations. They were not 
immature or indifferent and each had a conscience a 
more active conscience, in fact, than that of the average 
individual; but internal strife was strong enough to break 
down these barriers. What happened to them was as 
inevitable as the result, say, of sealing the top and nozzle 
of a teakettle filled with water and starting a fire under it. 
Steam that cannot escape through normal channels must 
break through some other way. 

Both Edward and Irene were cured by psychotherapy. 
This treatment is not always effective, however, even when 
it is continued over a considerable period of time. In such 
a case, the patient has to be placed in an institution. 

Leonard, a sixteen-year-old delinquent, was arrested for 
burglary after he had broken into a store, a school, and a 
residence. Each time, he had stolen articles that he did 
not especially want. In the last two places he had left 
behind letters full of criticism, through which he was 
traced and discovered to be the thief. This boy was the 
oldest of four children. His father, who had been a prob- 

192 



Juvenile Delinquents 

lem in high school, had once been arrested for stealing a 
bicycle. After his marriage, the father had become in- 
dustrious but not notably successful. He worked long 
hours, came home irritable, and gave his family little 
consideration. Leonard was always afraid of him. Though 
the boy's mother took the attitude that she had made her 
bed and would continue to lie in it, she resented her hus- 
band's lack of consideration and attention. Sometimes she 
vented her displeasure on Leonard, who resembled his 
father. Normally, however, she showed affection for her 
children and Leonard reciprocated. 

During his childhood the boy presented no special prob- 
lems except that he wet the bed until he was five years old 
and never got along very well with other children. His 
serious problems arose during adolescence. At that time, 
he felt inferior to other boys and attributed this to his 
small stature. Although he wanted his mother's love and 
experienced sex wishes directed toward her, he was embar- 
rassed by her demonstrations of affection and felt disturbed 
afterward. At the age of fifteen, he began to have homo- 
sexual relations, which disturbed him greatly and caused 
him to feel worthless. His schoolwork suffered and his 
teachers criticized him for his inattention and what they 
called his indifference. 

Among the many adolescent problems behind Leonard's 
behavior one of the most significant was his intense sense 
of guilt. He felt that he was very bad and wanted to be 
punished. In his burglaries he not only expressed resent- 
ment but, by writing letters that would inevitably point to 
him as the thief, he made sure that he would be caught. In 
other words, he did not want the articles he stole but, by 

193 



A Psychology of Growth 

accepting censure and punishment for burglary, he obtained 
relief from the sense of guilt that resulted from homo- 
sexuality and his feeling toward his mother. Psychiatrists 
who have analyzed many cases of juvenile delinquency 
have usually traced misconduct to emotional distress. Why 
some individuals react with the aggressive behavior of the 
delinquent, while others become sensitive and shut in, is a 
question that has not been fully explained. In many cases, 
the boys and girls reflect the patterns that we noted in the 
newborn infants; that is, some respond to insult by a passive 
behavior, while others make violent outbursts. No definite 
conclusion is warranted on the basis of the few cases that 
have been analyzed from this point of view, but it suggests 
a possible theory. Unquestionably the delinquent is very 
often a child who was rejected from the time of birth and 
was faced with impossible standards. He has resentments 
and often appears to be indifferent. Usually he has an 
intense sense of guilt. His emotional growth has been dis- 
torted. He is ill and requires careful medical (psychiatric) 
care. 

Delinquents whose behavior does not bring them into 
court are frequently sent to military school. Court cases 
that do not yield to psychiatric or social treatment lead 
to the reform school. Authorities recognize, however, that 
these institutions do not cure the condition. Obviously, 
discipline cannot correct behavior due to emotional con- 
flicts over which the individual has no control. The reform 
school is only a step on the path that leads to the peniten- 
tiary. Much more efficacious treatment is afforded by 
placing the delinquent in a boarding home and giving him 

. 194 - 



Juvenile Delinquents 

psychiatric care. In this way the youth is removed from 
the ^environment where his difficulties arose and has the 
benefit of treatment by a skilled, trained worker, who is 
often able to give him new emotional outlets and to help 
him form interests that enable him to relieve his anxieties. 

Another group of adolescents whose plight is equally 
serious from a medical point of view has received far less 
attention than the juvenile delinquent. It is made up 
of those whose emotional conflicts form anxieties to which 
they respond by becoming shut in and by developing neu- 
rotic corftplaints. 

Frank belonged to this group. When he was examined 
at the age of seventeen, he was a junior in high school doing 
passing work. He did not enter into the social program 
of the school, had no friends, and spent much time listening 
to the radio or aimlessly wandering around town. At home 
he said little and was irritated when his parents attempted 
to talk to him or when they urged him to attend social 
events. He complained of vague headaches, for which no 
physical basis could be found. 

Like the majority of such patients, Frank was not very 
communicative with the physician at first and usually 
asserted that there was nothing wrong with him. As the 
physician won his confidence, however, he described strong 
feelings of inferiority and inadequacy and the fear that he 
experienced when he had to talk to anyone or when he was 
called upon to recite in school. He felt that he was not 
liked and finally concluded that no one had ever liked him. 
He displayed some interest in mechanics and had con- 
siderable aptitude; his father was helpful in encouraging 

195 



A Psychology of Growth 

him to set up a workshop at home. During his senior year, 
when he had this added interest, he worked hard and 
gained admission to an engineering school. 

Although he was now able to discuss many problems and 
to gain an insight into his difficulties, he still kept apart 
from others after he entered college. In his second year 
he formed a few friendships and had dates with girls, but 
on those occasions he was so nervous that, he said, "my 
hands shook if I even tried to drink a coke." However, 
he was determined to understand his fears and was able to 
make appreciable progress. 

During his two years in the army, Frank did fairly well. 
He was still unsure of himself and became boastful and 
egocentric, in an effort to compensate for his feeling of 
inferiority. It is significant that he did not develop battle 
fatigue. He readily admitted that in conflict he knew 
extreme fear and trembled so greatly that he had difficulty 
in performing the operations assigned to him. When he 
was injured, he experienced a feeling of great relief at the 
prospect of being relieved of further duty. Probably the 
reason why he did not develop battle fatigue was that he 
had a considerable insight into the origin of his fears and 
realized that there were many other soldiers as frightened 
as he was. 

After five years of intermittent treatment, he has become 
outwardly a sociable, friendly individual, but his mind is 
not at ease. He still feels that he is not liked, although he 
knows that this is not true. His present pattern of behavior 
will probably follow him through life. If he continues to 
be successful, he will build up more self-confidence; if he 
fails, he will become more uncomfortable. 

Reactions such as Frank's, which are not uncommon 



Juvenile Delinquents 

among boys, appear still more frequently in girls. They 
account for that large group of high-school girls and women 
who are nervous. The anxieties that often give rise to 
somatic complaints, such as abdominal distress, colitis, 
rapid heart, and weakness are due to the insecurity, resent- 
ment, fear, and sense of guilt that have been present from 
birth. These produce fixed habits of response during 
adolescence and finally bring about the suppressed and 
exhausting anxieties of adulthood. 

REFERENCES 

1. "Report of the Committee for Investigating the Causes 

of the Alarming Increase in Juvenile Delinquency in 
the Metropolis," printed by J. F. Done, St. Johns 
Square, London, 1816. 

2. SPAULDING, EDITH R., and WILLIAM HEALY, "Inheri- 

tance as a Factor in Criminality," Physical Basis of 
Crime: a Symposium; papers and discussions before 
the 38th annual meeting of the American Academy of 
Medicine, Minneapolis, June, 1913, p. 19, Am- 
erican Academy of Medicine Press, Easton, Pa., 1914. 

3. GORING, CHARLES, "The English Convict," p. 263, H. M. 

Stationery Office, London, 1913. 

4. MURCHINSON, CARL, "Criminal Intelligence," p. 43, 

Clark University Press, Worcester, Mass. 

5. KRETGHMER, E., "Physique and Character," translated 

by J. H. Sprots, Harcourt, Brace and Company, Inc., 
New York, 1925. 

6. SHAW, CLIFFORD, and HENRY D. McKAY, "Social 

Factors in Juvenile Delinquency," Report on the 
Causes of Crime, National Commission on Law En- 
forcement and Observance, No. 13, vol. II, p. 276, 
Washington, D.C., 1913. 

197 . 



A Psychology of Growth 

7. RECKLESS, WALTER G, "The Etiology of Delinquency 

and Criminal Behavior," Social Service Research 
Council, 230 Park Avenue, New York. 

8. CARR-SAUNDERS, A. M., HERMANN MANHEIM, and E. C. 

RHODES, "Young Offenders, An Enquiry into Juve- 
nile Delinquency," The Macmillan Company, New 
York, and University Press (John Wilson & Son, 
Inc.), Cambridge, Mass. 

BOOKS ON SEX EDUCATION 

For Children 

STRAIN, FRANCES B., "Being Born," The Macmillan Com- 
pany, New York, 1936. 

STRAIN, FRANCES B., "Love at the Threshold," D. Appleton- 
Century Company, Inc., New York. 

LEVINE, MILTON L., and JEAN H. SELIGMAN, "The Wonder 
of Life," Simon and Schuster, Inc., New York. 

DE SCHWEINITZ, KARL, "Growing Up," The Macmillan 
Company, New York, 1928. 

For Adults 

XEVY, JOHN, and RUTH MONROE, "The Happy Family," 
Alfred A. Knopf, New York, 1935. 

STONE, ABRAHAM, and HANNAH MAYER STONE, "A Mar- 
riage Manual, "Simon and Schuster, Inc., New York. 

SWIFT, EDITH HALE, "Step by Step in Sex Education," 
The Macmillan Company, New York. 

STRAIN, FRANCES B., "New Patterns in Sex Teaching," D. 
Appleton-Century Company, Inc., New York, 1934. 

HAMILTON, G. V., "A Research in Marriage," Albert and 
Charles Boni, Inc., New York. 

* 198 



Chapter Thirteen 



Adults 

An adult is an individual who can meet new and dif- 
ficult situations in life and make an adjustment to them. 
At this point it is well to review growth and development 
from birth. Adults like to work but also go back to their 
childhood for a certain amount of play. All adults have 
rational fears and hates; also irrational fears and irra- 
tional hates. Adults desire to rear a family, to work, and 
to create. Many symptoms are produced by the effect of 
intense feelings upon the Physiological processes via the 
sympathetic nervous system. 

Neurosis is an exaggeration of normal emotions. Neu- 
rotic individuals are controlled by their unconscious anx- 
ieties: fears, hates, sense of guilt. They are unable to 
grow up and act like adults. To them everything is ter- 
rible. There is no line of deviation between the normal 
and the neurotic individual. Anyone may "break" if 
conditions are too difficult. 

"Psychopathic personality" is the name given to the 
state of a group of immature individuals who have little 
or no sense of right and wrong. These individuals are 
often troublesome. 

An alcoholic is an individual who cannot stop drinking, 
after he has had one or two drinks, until he makes himself 
completely dependent. Some individuals develop obsessions 

199 



A Psychology of Growth 

that they recognize as irrational but are still unable to 
control. This behavior often becomes compulsive. 

Sexual impulses may be distorted. Exhibitionism, 
sadism, fetishism, and so on, are examples. In these 
individuals there is a suppression of normal sex wishes 
and such distortion of sex impulses that they no longer have 
the biological function of propagation. 

Psychoses are forms of mental illness in which the 
patients lose contact with reality. The manic-depressive 
condition and dementia praecox are the most serious forms 
of mental illness. 



ADULTHOOD may be defined in many ways, but from the 
point of view of this study we might describe an adult 
as an individual who has grown up and so fitted himself for 
life that he can adjust to new and difficult situations. When 
misfortune comes, he can take it in stride. This standard, 
to be sure, is purely relative, since there is no person who 
may not become emotionally disturbed and "break" if his 
difficulties become sufficiently serious. Some individuals, 
however, have a lower breaking point than others. 

In order to understand these differences, let us look back 
at the steps in the development of an adult. Each indi- 
vidual is one infinitesimal unit in the life of all mankind. 
Since he is only a link in a very long chain, a living replica 
of his ancestors for countless generations, he is ancient 
even at the moment of birth. His life, like that of every 
other living thing, is a growth process. This process begins 
with conception and continues to senility. Growth is most 
rapid before birth, but follows at a swift pace through 

200 



Adults 

infancy and accelerates again during adolescence. It may 
proceed continuously or it may be interrupted, either before 
or after birth, by toxic or poisonous agents Or disease. It 
may also continue for a time and then reverse itself, as in 
the deteriorating diseases. After birth, suitable environ- 
ment may encourage growth; unsuitable environment may 
arrest or stunt it or cause regression. Growth is stimulated 
by growth energy that is, vitality with which the indi- 
vidual is endowed from the time of conception. The 
amount of growth energy varies with the individual. 

Everyone is born with potentialities for the development 
of growth patterns that determine his physical stature, 
intellectual capacity, and emotional responses. He may 
also have certain inherent abilities and handicaps. En- 
vironment will affect these elements to some degree but will 
not change them. Growth occurs in a definite, orderly 
sequence, which varies among individuals only in regard 
to rate and extent. In other words, each individual follows 
a universal sequence of growth changes, but does so at his 
own rate of speed and can attain only the size and capa- 
bilities inherent in himself. 

A normal infant has at birth a well-developed and func- 
tioning mechanism that regulates vegetative, physiologic, 
and metabolic processes and emotional responses. He has 
his own rhythmic pattern of sleeping, waking, and desiring 
food. The type and degree of his emotional response, 
which we call temperament, is also individual. He re- 
sponds in terms of satisfaction and complacency or of fear 
and hate. 

The newborn infant is completely dependent and his 
behavior is controlled by his feelings. Yet from the moment 

201 



A Psychology of Growth 

of birth he must meet the biological demands of his growing 
organism and the requirements of a complicated society. 
As his central nervous system develops and he gains experi- 
ence, he begins to learn how to meet various situations and 
with frequent repetition his responses become habits. 
Growth and learning come from within the individual and 
the learning process is lifelong. 

Every infant has certain fundamental physical, intel- 
lectual, and emotional needs, which his environment must 
supply if he is to attain maximum growth. When his needs 
are satisfied, he gains self-confidence, which makes for con- 
structive aggression and enables him to learn about him- 
self and his world. As he grows older he forms habits of 
responsibility, becomes independent, self-reliant, and able 
to cope with the inevitable problems that arise in hu- 
man society. 

The child's mental needs are (1) security, which comes 
from the assurance that he is wanted and accepted as he is; 
(2) opportunity to grow up naturally at his own pace 
that is, freedom from standards inappropriate to his age 
and capacity. In this regard, the most important environ- 
mental factor is the attitude of the child's parents. His 
security or insecurity will be based on the fact that his 
parents love him wholeheartedly or with reservations, or 
actually hate him; on their ability or failure to make him 
feel that everything is all right and that he is acceptable to 
them, or by their tendency to see in him problems that are 
in their own minds. His second need will or will not be 
supplied, depending upon whether the parents establish 
standards to which the child is capable of measuring up or 
whether, because of their own prejudices, insecurities, 

202. 



Adults 

fatigue, or lack of knowledge, they demand too great 
achievement; whether they help him to feel useful or thwart 
his efforts through overprotection or underprotection. 
When the environment places too many difficulties in the 
way of the individual, his growth is stunted or distorted or 
he regresses to a less mature level at which he feels more 
comfortable. Thus the child whose needs have been sup- 
plied is able to meet adversity with confidence and to make 
an adjustment. On the other hand, the insecure and 
thwarted child or adult lacks self-confidence and reacts 
with either overcompliance or ovcrdefiance. 

In the course of the baby's first two or three years, he is 
interested primarily in his own physiologic processes and 
in learning to use his body. He begins to walk, talk, and 
coordinate his eyes and hands while walking and running. 
Next he becomes curious about concrete objects and about 
his surroundings. All his investigations are fun; these 
learning processes are pure play. 

During childhood, the boy and the girl are most interested 
in their developing bodies and their newly acquired freedom 
after the dependence of infancy. They want to learn and 
they want to do things, but they are selfish and self-centered. 
Unlike the infant, who is impatient and must have his wants 
satisfied immediately, the child can wait a short time 
(though not without difficulty) for the fulfillment of his 
wishes. Since he does not have to take care of himself, 
his activities are still of a playful nature. Maturation, 
however, causes him to feel that he is grown up and needs 
a place in society. For that reason his learning processes 
are directed toward a vocation. 

In order to have mental health, it is not necessary for the 

203 - 



A Psychology oj Growth 

individual to reach any peak of perfection,, but only to 
realize his own potentialities, however limited these may 
be, and to have acquired the ability to make necessary 
adjustments. An adult who is well mentally works and 
plays, laughs and cries, loves and hates, experiences fear 
and self-confidence, does some things with ease, does others 
with difficulty, but above all is possessed of sufficient self- 
confidence and understanding of himself, enough habits of 
responsibility to stand on his own feet and meet new 
situations without breaking down. 

It is the rate of change rather than the change itself that 
determines the ease with which an individual can make an 
adjustment; the more rapid the changes, the greater the 
problem of adjustment. Because of the rapid social and 
economic changes that have occurred in the past fifty years 
this period has presented an unusual test for mental health. 

Adulthood is a continuation of the growth process. 
Physically, the maximum growth is usually reached within 
the first twenty to twenty-two years; the maximum intellec- 
tual capacity, which is determined by the individual's 
maximum mental age, is usually acquired when he is 
between the chronological ages of thirteen and twenty-two. 
However, mental growth as a whole (this includes emotional 
development) can continue until an individual reaches 
senility; that is, until his brain begins to deteriorate from 
inadequate blood supply or for other reasons. This pro- 
longed mental growth depends upon the ability of the 
person to learn to profit by mistakes and continue to develop 
self-confidence and skill in solving the problems that life 
presents. The sum of the habits of response that he has 
been forming since birth make up his personality. 

204 



Adults 

These responses are affected (1) by the amount of vitality, 
the potentialities, and traits with which he was born; and 
(2) by environment. The individual's inborn and un- 
changeable characteristics are strength, general intelli- 
gence, special abilities (such as aptitude for music or art), 
motor coordination (which gives rise to mechanical skill), 
alertness and speed of response, and special defects (for 
example, weakness, clumsiness, limited intelligence, total 
or partial tone deafness, and poor visual memory, which 
causes reading difficulties). In addition, his responses 
normally include both justifiable and irrational fears and 
hates. The latter are emotions that are not warranted by 
the occasion that arouses them, as is illustrated by the 
person who always fears the worst and the one who, in 
addition, has a temper tantrum when he does not get his 
own way. Environment has the effect of stunting or 
furthering growth; it determines the individual's confidence 
or anxiety, prejudices, beliefs, and general philosophy of 
life. By the time he has reached adulthood, the effects of 
these influences have so crystalized into personality patterns 
that his reactions to situations have become readily pre- 
dictable. In other words, although adults like to think 
that their behavior is reasonable and logical, it is actually 
controlled by these well-developed patterns without refer- 
ence to reason or insight. When these trends are guided 
by irrational fears and resentments, they form the basis 
for typical neurotic behavior. 

No adult grows up so completely that he does not go back 
to childhood and enjoy a certain amount of play, such as 
golf, tennis, or card games. These activities and other 
diversions are nonetheless beneficial because they are play; 

205 



A Psychology of Growth 

since they provide rest and relaxation, they are valuable 
from the standpoint of health. Similarly, motion pictures, 
prize fights, and other recreations provide outlets for pent- 
up resentments and unsatisfied wish fulfillments and thus 
improve mental health. Some persons need these activities 
more than others. The individual who has no athletic 
ability derives pleasure from the success of one player or 
team of which he has become a partisan; the individual who 
cannot fight releases a great deal of resentment when his 
favorite beats an opponent. Anyone can identify him- 
or herself with the hero or heroine of a play and find satis- 
faction in watching the story unfold on the screen. Proof 
that there is a need for these emotional outlets is amply 
furnished by million-dollar prize fights and the extent of 
the motion-picture industry. 

Other characteristics of the adult are his desire to rear a 
family and to work and create. Incidentally, his work may 
benefit others as well as himself. The fact that he does 
it for his personal satisfaction, however, does not detract 
from his usefulness and value to society. 

Although some adults work with satisfaction and com- 
placency most of the time, all have certain illogical sub- 
conscious prejudices, which influence their judgment. For 
example, a very good businessman who hired many girls 
did not realize until it was pointed out to him that his 
selection was greatly affected by his predilection for red 
hair. Another man was prejudiced against girls who used 
lipstick because his mother, to whom he was very much 
attached, had never rouged her lips. People frequently 
judge others on the basis of a single characteristic. An 
individual who does not like obesity will consider a fat 
> 206 



Adults 

woman very inferior, regardless of her other character- 
istics. The president of one corporation distrusted any 
person who did not look him straight in the eye while 
they were talking together. A very intelligent woman who 
learned that for years her husband had been unfaithful was 
worried only because he lied to her about minor details 
when he made his confession. All adults, even those who 
have mental health, possess ideas of this kind. They repre- 
sent unconscious childhood impressions that continue to 
exert their influence during adult life. 

Sally, who was very well liked, incited ten associates to 
give up their jobs because of the conduct of a foreman who 
had reprimanded her. Analysis of the situation showed that 
the trouble began when one girl employee drew pictures of 
a fat and a thin cat and wrote Sally's name under the 
former. Sally, an extremely sensitive girl who was particu- 
larly disturbed about her obesity, became very angry and 
made many complaints about the girl who drew the 
pictures, ending with a demand that the foreman dis- 
charge her. He had found this girl to be a very efficient 
worker and, having no knowledge of the reasons underlying 
Sally's demand, he not only refused to do what she asked 
but also charged her with being a troublemaker. Sally, in 
turn, persuaded her friends to quit. When the nature of 
the trouble was made clear to all concerned, ruffled feelings 
were soothed and everybody went back to work. This 
incident illustrates the manner in which group behavior 
can be influenced by one individual's sensitiveness about 
himself. It shows the necessity for supervisors, whether 
they are foremen, nurses, or others, to look for the attitudes, 
either logical or illogical, that influence behavior. 

207 



A Psychology of Growth 

All adult minds are furnished not only with attitudes 
but also with various convictions and, possibly, superstitions. 
The convictions, which may be religious, political, or social 
in nature, are usually unconscious attempts to satisfy child- 
hood anxieties remaining in the adult mind or to justify 
ideas that the individual received as a child but was unable 
to understand. Superstitions are beliefs that control the 
individual's behavior even though he cannot explain them 
logically. 

Thus the child is indeed father of the man. From him 
the man inherits all the resentments, anxieties, and ways of 
responding that he acquired in his early years. The adult 
represses his unpleasant experiences that is, forces them 
out of his consciousness but they remain in his unconscious 
mind and influence his feelings and actions even to the 
extent of causing him to behave in a manner contrary to 
the dictates of his conscious mind. This is shown, for 
instance, in the conduct of a person who finds it difficult or 
impossible to do certain things because he is frightened, even 
though he knows that there is no danger. Another ex- 
ample is the behavior of the individual who loses his temper, 
in spite of the fact that he realizes that his anger is illogical 
and will keep him from accomplishing what he most wants 
to do. 

The effect of emotions upon physiological processes and 
the relationship of these influences on disease processes 
makes up psychosomatic medicine. 

As has been pointed out by physiologists, notably 
Cannon, 1 emotions are expressed along the neurons of the 
autonomic nervous system. The cranial autonomies nor- 
mally control digestion, heart, sex, and other organs and 

208 



Adults 

functions of the body. Where there is pain, fear, or rage, 
however, the sympathetics take over and drastic changes in 
function of the organs take place. Notably gastric and 
sex functions are markedly suppressed and there is a dis- 
charge of adrenin and an increase in blood sugar. When 
adrenin is injected in both normal and abnormal individ- 
uals, there is precordial and epigastric palpitation, diffuse 
arterial throbbing, oppression in the chest, trembling, chilli- 
ness, dryness of the mouth, fear, malaise, and weakness. 
The heart beats more rapidly, arterioles are contracted, 
bronchioles are dilated, and blood pressure is raised. These 
changes are explained upon an evolutionary basis as prepa- 
ration of .the animal for fighting defense. 

At least one writer, Klemperer, points out the importance 
of spasm of the coronary vessels in coronary disease. He 
feels that this spasm produces localized anemia of the 
muscle and weakening of the wall of the blood vessel, so 
that small hemorrhages occur from which inflammatory 
processes develop. All cardiologists feel that intense emo- 
tions are a factor in coronary disease. For detailed dis- 
cussions of this important factor read "Emotion and Bodily 
Changes" by Flanders H. Dunbar. 2 Internists agree that 
the effects of intense emotions are a factor in gastric ulcer. 

These physiological reactions to intense emotions are 
present in both normal and abnormal individuals. Those 
who have intense irrational emotions are affected to a pro- 
portionally greater degree. In many patients the symptoms 
from these physiological reactions are sufficient to cause 
illness without organic disease. Gastric disturbances, some 
forms of colitis, and cardiac neurosis are common examples. 

When fears and resentments dominate an individual's 

209 - 



A Psychology of Growth 

personality and prevent him from gaining sufficient satis- 
faction in life, he is said to be "nervous" or neurotic. 
Because his childhood and his environment were never 
solved, he is constantly impelled to indulge in behavior that 
gives him a needed satisfaction. He experiences the same 
feelings that he had during his childhood, and when difficult 
situations confront him he reacts in terms of youthful fears, 
resentments, and a sense of guilt. Unable to assume the 
role of a self-reliant adult, he goes back to an earlier, more 
dependent status. This process is known as regression. 
Mental ill-health, then, is a return to an immature level of 
growth. It varies from the temporary and partial to the 
complete return to childhood; that is, from the milder forms 
of neurosis to the vegetative state that appears in the end 
stages of dementia praecox. Neurotics make up the largest 
group of those persons who are mentally ill. 

Neuroses often begin with lack of parental approval at 
birth. Frequently this attitude is coupled wih the imposi- 
tion of standards too high for the child to meet. Conse- 
quently, he becomes frightened and resentful of his own 
parents. As he grows up and his conscience develops, he is 
oppressed by a strong sense of inferiority. He resents his 
lot and is frightened of his own thoughts and feelings. The 
observer sees him as a person who complains a great deal, 
exaggerates symptoms of illness, and has temper tantrums. 
Even though he recognizes that his behavior is often illogi- 
cal, he cannot alter it because he is impelled by fears over 
which he has no control. 

It is not necessary to go far to find an example of the 
neurotic who lives in his childhood and is governed by early 
anxieties. There was Mr. A, for example, a capable busi- 

- 210 



Adults 

nessman who was always afraid in the dark. Analysis of 
his fear revealed that it had originated in his childhood, at 
which time he had been very much afraid of his father. 
When he was in a dark room he imagined that a man was 
going to hit him. In describing this assailant, he said the 
man was "my father with whiskers like the devil's." Mr. A 
was frightened, also, when he was interviewing clients. If 
someone disagreed with him, he experienced the same sen- 
sations that he had known when his father struck him and 
said, "What the hell is the matter with you?" In a recur- 
ring dream, which had begun in his childhood, he was falling 
from a high point in a tall building and his father was look- 
ing at him from a window of each floor that he passed. 

A student nurse, who had been doing very good work, 
began to have great difficulty in her classes when a resident 
physician, for some reason, got into the habit of baiting her. 
As a child she had been subjected to much criticism by her 
parents and had come to the point where she was always 
afraid that she might make a mistake. When criticism 
was unjust, she became so disturbed that her work suffered, 
until finally she had difficulty in speaking and began to 
show other forms of infantile behavior. 

Conscious or semiconscious fears and anxieties frequently 
produce somatic symptoms, such as abdominal distress, 
choking spells, rapid heart, and others. These symptoms, 
in turn, frighten the sufferer still more, and he thinks, in 
panic, that he has cancer, heart disease, or some other ail- 
ment of which he is going to die. It should be borne in 
mind that such symptoms are very real to the patient and 
should not be ridiculed or laughed off as pure imagination. 
The patient is extremely uncomfortable and no less ill 

211 



A Psychology of Growth 

than one who has some organic disease. He is as. badly 
in need of medical in this case, psychiatric treatment as 
any sick person. 

There is no sharp line separating the mentally well 
individual from the neurotic. All persons have some illogi- 
cal or irrational emotions. It is when those Demotions 
control the individual's behavior that he is considered 
neurotic and even this criterion is not absolute. In general, 
the neurotic is the person in whom the mental qualities of 
the normal individual are exaggerated and who over- 
responds to circumstances. 

Of all forms of mental ill-health, neurosis is the most 
amenable to psychiatric help. The first step consists in 
letting the patient know that he cannot help being what he 
is or doing what he docs. In that case he need not feel 
ashamed of his fears and hates or guilty because of them. 
Neither should he worry about somatic symptoms that are 
not organic but the product of his fears. Since it is harm- 
ful for the patient to repress his emotional problems, the 
next step in his treatment is an examination of his fears, 
hates, and sense of guilt, with a view to discovering their 
origin. As the child, cowering in the dark, throws off his 
fears when someone turns on the light and shows him that 
the supposed burglar was only a flapping window shade, 
so the neurotic is freed of many fears when he is helped to 
see that his anxiety is a relic of his childhood with no current 
validity. If his present uncertainty is due to an old fear of 
his father, for example, and he realizes that when he is 
governed by this fear he is simply continuing to live in his 
childhood, he is better able to analyze and improve his 
present situation. 
212 



Adults 

Other irrational anxieties and resentments likewise 
become less disturbing when the patient understands that 
they are reactions that were conditioned by childhood 
insecurities. We have seen that fear of hate is one of the 
serious anxieties in the mind of the neurotic. It can be 
diminished when he finds out that he cannot help hating 
one person or another and that neither love nor hate is 
100 per cent pure, but that both may be evoked simul- 
taneously by one individual. The neurotic may lose his 
intense sense of guilt if he can be made to understand that 
he loved his father or his mother or some other close relative 
at the same time that he hated this person, but that his love 
was probably stronger than his hatred. 

In caring for a neurotic it is helpful for the nurse, who 
should first understand herself, to avoid putting a personal 
construction upon the patient's resentments and complaints. 
The ill temper that he vents on her or the hospital is prob- 
ably only an expression of his fear. Irrational fears, which 
are present in the mind of every patient, are more pro- 
nounced in the neurotic than in the normal person and 
more common in the hospital than in any other place. 
Furthermore, it is safe to assume that the patient, particu- 
larly the one who is going to have an operation, is afraid of 
dying. The hospital routine is probably unfamiliar and 
the patient may have difficulty in adjusting to it. A bed 
patient is especially sensitive about exposing himself, using 
bedpans, and operation gowns, and undergoing various 
forms of treatment. The skilled nurse is sympathetic, 
whatever the patient's behavior. She does not side either 
with the hospital or with the patient, but makes him feel 
that she understands his attitude. She shows an interest 

213 



A Psychology of Growth 

in him and solicitude for his feelings as well as his welfare. 
This she can do only if she is objective and does not permit 
her personality difficulties to affect her point of view. 

It usually relieves a patient to be able to talk about his 
problems. The nurse cannot solve them, but she can do 
good by listening sympathetically. In fact, that nurse helps 
most who listens most. She does not help her patient by 
discussing other patients or her own problems. 

PSYCHOPATHIC PERSONALITY 

When we use the terms "constitutional psychopathic 
state," "emotional insufficiency, 35 "psychopathic personal- 
ity, 33 "moral imbecility," and "moral insanity, 3 ' we have in 
mind one troublesome and often unapproachable group of 
individuals. The person who falls into this category is one 
who knows the difference between right and wrong but is 
unable to act accordingly. He attempts to reach his own 
goals with no consideration for others and with complete 
indifference to the regulations of society. He may ignore 
all sensible plans and intentions, become a truant or a 
periodic drinker, and develop a tendency to reckless spend- 
ing. Like a child who cannot wait for the fulfillment of his 
wishes, the psychopath must have what he wants at once, 
no matter what the cost. Because of his childish impul- 
siveness, he usually fails to achieve his purposes, and this 
frustration makes him still more aggressive and indifferent 
to social codes. He will become pathological in his lying, 
try violent avenues of escape, and develop ideas of persecu- 
tion. Being unable to meet social demands, he may 
attempt to change society and become an agitator or a 

- 214 



Adults 

fanatic. If he has qualities of leadership, he may carry 
others along into antisocial endeavors. 

This individual's behavior is not due to lack of intelli- 
gence but to insufficient emotional growth. He may have 
good ideas, converse well, be good-natured, sociable, and 
cheerful. As a rule, he is also vain and arrogant and 
conveys the impression that he has a high opinion of his 
own ability and is sure of himself. At other times, however, 
he is morose, irritable, and defiant, and has temper out- 
bursts. He never admits that he is wrong. 

The psychopath, then, is an individual who has been 
unable to grow up and take on responsibility for his be- 
havior. His irrational actions can best be explained by 
comparison with the impulsive, insecure, frustrated child. 
Both feel that they are not approved but cannot understand 
the reason for their unhappiness. They therefore try to 
prove that they are indifferent and find their only satis- 
faction in retaliating foe their injuries by causing trouble. 
The psychopath's behavior is immature and compulsive. 

ALCOHOLISM 

Alcoholism may be associated with a neurotic, psycho- 
pathic personality or with other forms of mental ill-health. 
It is compulsive behavior and may be regarded as a symp- 
tom of regression toward infancy. This is shown by the 
fact that, after taking one or two drinks, the alcoholic is 
unable to stop until he is completely drunk, at which time, 
like the infant, he is absolutely dependent and needs to have 
someone take care of him. The case histories of alcoholics 
commonly include extremely severe fathers and mothers 
who were prone to overprotect their children. 

215 



A Psychology of Growth 

A typical case was presented by John, who, at the age 
of twenty-one, was examined by a physician because of 
alcoholism of two years' duration. This young man de- 
scribed alcoholism very well in reply to the question of what 
he would do with a given amount of money if permitted to 
spend it at will. His answer was that he would go down 
town and decide to have one drink. After he had taken 
one, he would be unable to stop drinking until he had 
spent all his money except the sum that he habitually paid 
a taxi driver to take him home. The next day he would 
wake up in bed with his mother sitting beside him. From 
past experience, John knew that he would have no recol- 
lection of saving the necessary money or hiring the cab, 
and that he would have no interest in anyone during the 
time he was intoxicated. Here was a patient, therefore, 
who felt compelled to drink, disclaimed any understanding 
of his behavior or memory of his actions while drunk, hired 
someone to take him to his mother, and depended upon her 
to care for him as she had done when he was an infant. 

John's father was an efficient businessman, who employed 
ruthless methods in his commercial affairs and carried them 
into his home. He was a stern disciplinarian and never 
supplied the boy with anything except what would meet 
his purely material needs. The mother, feeling that her 
husband was too severe, overindulged the boy and pro- 
tected him from his father. As a result, John had never 
been able to behave consistently like an adult; periodically 
he had to go back to his infancy. 

OBSESSION AND COMPULSION 

Some individuals develop obsessions, which they recog- 
nize as irrational but are still unable to control. There 
. 216 . 



Adults 

was a young woman, for example, who had the idea that 
she would kill her baby; another who was sure that she 
would scream and run out into the street naked; and a man 
who was convinced that he would insult women. These 
persons were actually very conservative and their behavior 
was most considerate and proper. Obsessions represent the 
opposite of actual behavior. 

In time, however, persons who have such obsessions often 
develop compulsive behavior. This is illustrated by the 
conduct of a man whose obsession was the fear of harming 
someone. At night he took two hours to assure himself 
that everything was safe in his household. He locked the 
doors and windows, then went back repeatedly to make sure 
that they were secure. He also slammed the refrigerator 
door and closed the matchbox again and again, tried the 
faucets fifty to a hundred times, used blotting paper to test 
them for leaks, and felt the bottom of the sink and the 
lavatory, to be certain that they were dry. During this 
procedure, he perspired heavily and criticized himself for 
his foolish behavior. 

This man was very quiet, considerate, and honest. For 
twelve years he had punched the time clock daily at exactly 
eleven minutes before he was due on the job. He was a 
perfectionist and always did far more work than was 
required of him. Inquiry revealed, however, that this 
behavior was diametrically opposed to his underlying feel- 
ings toward people. As a child, he had undergone great 
hardships. After the death of his mother when he was 
three years old, his alcoholic father had beaten and other- 
wise abused him. As a result of these experiences, he had 
grown up feeling intense resentment. 

. 217 . 



A Psychology of Growth 

SEXUAL ABERRATIONS 

Sexual impulses may be distorted in many different ways. 
Exhibitionism, as we have seen, is one form of distortion. 
Others are sadism, the wish to give the partner pain; and 
masochism, the wish to be hurt. Some individuals cannot 
accept certain forms of affection unless they are accom- 
panied by pain. A sixteen-year-old girl, for example, did 
not enjoy being kissed unless, at the same time, the man 
stamped on her feet or kicked her legs. One young woman 
could not accept sex relations unless her husband slapped 
her, as if he were forcing her to submit to him. Some 
persons derive sexual satisfaction from seeing others naked 
or from watching them have sexual intercourse. Sex 
impulses may be directed toward others of the same sex 
(homosexuality) or be satisfied by the use of the mouth 
(sex perversion). Other aberrations are paedophilia, zoo- 
philia, and fetishism that is, sexual desire directed, 
respectively, toward small children, toward animals, or 
toward parts of the body or articles of clothing. Paedo- 
philia combined with sadism is illustrated by the case of a 
fifteen-year-old boy who got satisfaction from undressing 
a small girl and hitting her over the head with a switch. 
Fetishism was exemplified by an eighteen-year-old boy who 
felt sexual excitement when he saw a man wearing sus- 
penders. 'In cases of sexual aberration, there is a sup- 
pression of normal sex wishes and such distortion of sex 
impulses that they no longer have the biological function of 
propagation. 

MANIC-DEPRESSIVE 

A person is said to be psychotic when he develops irra- 
tional behavior to the point where he no longer has control 
218 - 



Adults 

of his actions or insight into them and, therefore, completely 
loses contact with his environment. The two most com- 
mon functional psychoses that is, those which have no 
organic basis are the manic-depressive type and schizo- 
phrenia, or dementia praecox. 

The manic individual throws off all self-restraint. He is 
extremely restless, talks incessantly without inhibition, and 
continues this way for days, until he reaches the point of 
exhaustion. At other times, he may have periods of 
depression, when his conscience troubles him; he feels that 
he is bad and worthless and ought to kill himself. Some 
depressed patients are overwhelmed by anxiety and a sense 
of guilt and go into a panic. They are emotionally ill, their 
ideas about themselves are irrational, and they attribute 
their condition to minor misfortunes or unpleasant situ- 
ations. One such man blamed the OPA for his serious 
depression; another associated his condition with the pur- 
chase of an unsatisfactory used car; and a woman thought 
that her trouble was due to her sister's refusal to believe 
certain facts about their father. 

PARANOID INDIVIDUALS 

The paranoid individual is one who has an irrational 
conviction that others are trying to harm him. His delu- 
sions are wholly without foundation in fact and represent 
only distorted ideas in his own mind. His suspicions may 
take the form of a conviction that someone is trying to poison 
him, to take away his money, or to injure him socially, 
One man conceived the idea that a newspaper advertise- 
ment was attacking his character. He burned the paper 
and refused for weeks to look at another. Such an indi- 
vidual may also have exaggerated ideas about himself and 

219 



A Psychology of Growth 

come to believe that he is Napoleon or Caesar or some other 
famous person in history. 

Paranoiacs feel that they were treated unfairly when they 
were growing up, and this may be true. They are often 
the black sheep of their families. As such, they were dis- 
liked and discriminated against in the home. Convinced 
that they were not getting a square deal, they became 
negativistic and were subjected to even more criticism. 
Thus they developed strong feelings of inferiority and, at 
the same time, came to believe that others were taking 
advantage of them. The conviction that they are very 
superior is compensation for their feelings of inferiority 
and inadequacy. 

The true paranoiac remains alert and troublesome 
throughout his life. Those who deteriorate mentally are 
suffering from paranoid praecox. They slowly lose interest 
in other people, grow slovenly in appearance, and show 
little concern about their surroundings. This process 
covers a period of many years. 

DEMENTIA PRAECOX (SCHIZOPHRENIA) 

The most serious mental illness is dementia praecox. 
The patient develops unsystematized delusions and the 
most bizarre hallucinations (false perceptions), which seem 
to have no basis in fact or logic. He completely loses 
contact with his environment and lives in a dream world, 
in which his personality disintegrates and his behavior 
becomes entirely abnormal. 

As a rule, this illness takes definite form in adolescence. 
Study of early cases has provided some information regard- 
ing the origin of the disorder. In the beginning, a patient 

220 - 



Adults 

may explain that his mind is in two parts. One part, for 
example, says "Be good," while the other part says "Be 
bad." Later the patient may resolve this conflict by 
hearing voices that tell him what to do, or he may imagine 
that someone is pursuing him. These hallucinations and 
delusions may force him to try to escape, and he will then 
become a tramp and go from one place to another. Ab- 
sorbed in his mental aberrations, he rapidly loses interest 
in his surroundings and a slow but inexorable deterioration 
sets in. 

The group of dementia-praecox patients known as cata- 
tonic is characterized by extreme negativism. For ex- 
ample, an individual will refuse to change his position and, 
holding his muscles rigid, will resist every effort to move 
him. When he is told to do one thing, he is inclined to 
do the opposite. Such patients usually have catatonic 
episodes and are more cooperative between attacks. 

The most serious form of this disorder is called hebe- 
phrenic dementia praecox. Individuals who suffer from 
it develop the most irrational of delusions, such as that of 
a man who was convinced that he had no heart, despite 
the fact that he admitted it was impossible to live without 
one. These patients deteriorate more rapidly than the 
others and offer the poorest prognosis. They regress to a 
lower level than that of the newborn infant, because they 
do not even respond emotionally. Ultimately they reach 
a vegetative level, at which they have no control of any of 
their faculties and are unable to take responsibility even 
for toilet habits. 

Such mental deterioration represents the antithesis of 
that mental growth which is the objective of parents, 

- 221 



A Psychology of Growth 

nurses, and physicians. Although they cannot alter a 
child's innate characteristics, they can ease the inevitable 
tensions that lead to mental and emotional distortion and, 
with proper care, they can help him to achieve his max- 
imum development. 

REFERENCES 

1. CANNON, WALTER B., "Bodily Changes in Pain, Hun- 

ger, Fear and Rage," D. Appleton-Century Company, 
Inc., 1929. 

2. DUNBAR, FLANDERS H., "Emotions and Bodily Changes," 

Columbia University Press, New York, 1938. 



222 



List of Visual Aids 



The following list of visual aids can be used to supple- 
ment some of the material in this book. These films can 
be obtained from the producer or distributor listed with 
each title. (The addresses of these producers and dis- 
tributors are given at the end of the bibliography.) In 
many cases these films can also be obtained from your 
local film library or local film distributor; also, many 
universities have large film libraries from which these 
films can be borrowed. 

The running time (min) and whether it is silent (si) 
or sound (sd) are listed with each title. All those not 
listed as color (C) are black and white. All motion pic- 
tures are 16mm. 

Each film has been listed once in connection with the 
chapter to which it is most applicable. However, in many 
cases the film might be used advantageously in connection 
with other chapters. 

CHAPTER ONE THE FOUNDATION OF MENTAL HEALTH 

Life Begins (EBF GOmin sd) . Demonstrates individual 
growth patterns in different children; how children react 
to standardized test situations. 

Infant Behavior: Early Stages (EBF lOmin sd) . Shows 
the activities and responses of an infant seated in a small 
chair; compares same infant at different stages. 

Infant Behavior: Later Stages (EBF lOmin sd) . Dem- 
onstrates increasing ability of infant to use hands in 
manipulating objects. 

223 



List of Visual Aids 

Posture and Locomotion (EBF lOmin sd) . Deals with 
the stages by which an infant advances from a helpless 
state to the stage where he is able to change position and 
posture at will; presents a study of these phases of child's 
development from age eight to eighty weeks, thirteen age 
levels are portrayed. 

From Creeping to Walking (EBF lOmin sd) . Illus- 
trates the correlation of abilities; continues the study 
begun in Posture and Locomotion. 

Baby's Day at Twelve Weeks (EBF lOmin sd) Fol- 
lows an infant through his domestic day from time of 
awakening until final feeding at night; offers an inter- 
pretation of the significance of his various reactions. 

Thirty-six Weeks Behavior (EBF lOmin sd) . Com- 
pares behavior now with that of infant at twelve weeks; 
comments upon responses to the ministrations of father 
and mother; first successful creeping efforts are observed. 

Forty-eight Weeks Behavior (EBF lOmin sd) . Por- 
trays wholesome methods of child care; emphasis is placed 
upon psychological implications and the educational sig- 
nificance of the infant's everyday experiences. 

Behavior Patters at One Year (EBF lOmin sd) . At- 
tempts to clarify some of the principles which govern the 
learning process; discusses the possibilities and limitations 
of training infants from twenty-four to forty-eight weeks; 
also discusses relationships between age, growth, and learn- 
ing, laws which determine learning and several learning 
problems. 

Early Social Behavior (EBF lOmin sd) . Shows mani- 
festations of infant personality in a variety of social set- 
tings. 

Stages of Child Growth (EBF 20min sd) . Dr. Charlotte 
Buhler of Vienna demonstrates methods for giving ac- 

224 



List of Visual Aids 

complishment tests for infants and children of preschool 
age. 

The Study of Infant Behavior (B&H 20min sd) . Dr. 
Gessell's cinematographic record of reactions of infants 
in standardized situations. 

Normal Child Development (Rutgers 15min si C) . 
Genetic study of preschool child; responses to tests. 

Reaching Prehensive Behavior of Infant (Warden 
& Gilbert 15min si) . Development of hand-eye coordina- 
tion. 

Reaction of Infant to Pinprick (Warden & Gilbert 
15min si) . Individuation of responses illustrated. 

Reflex Behavior of Newborn Infant (Warden & Gil- 
bert 7 min si) . Illustrates Moro reflex, suspension grasp, 
crawling, stepping, and swimming. 

Some Basic Differences in Newborn Infants during the 
Laying-in Period (NYU 23min si) . Actual records of 
children from moment of birth; shows importance of 
mother's emotional adjustment to child for total develop- 
ment. 

Modern Motherhood (Marvin 15min si). Develop- 
ment of emotional life of child during first year. 

CHAPTER Two THE TWO-YEAR-OLD 

Now I Am Two (Dept. of Labor 30min si) . Story of 
a two-year-old's meals, play, and sleep. 

This Is Robert (NYU SOmin sd) . Traces the develop- 
ment of an aggressive, "difficult" child from two years to 
seven years; shows reasons for aggressiveness and corrective 
procedures. 

A Child Went Forth (NYU 20min sd) . Pictures two- to 

225 



List of Visual Aids 

seven-year-olds in a nursery camp; shows wide scope of 
activities and sympathetic guidance. 

Bending the Twig (Ideal 15min si) . Training the 
child in correct health and hygiene habits. 

Play's the Thing (Dept. of Labor 15min si). How to 
make play equipment: toys and muscle coordination. 

Finger Painting (NYU 20min sd) . Demonstrates the 
use of plastic materials by young children; portrays dif- 
ferences that underlie personality patterns. 

CHAPTER THREE ADJUSTING TO ENVIRONMENT 

Psychological Implications of Behavior during Clinical 
Visit (NYU 20min si) . Shows how important clues to 
a child's emotional attitudes can be seen from its overt 
behavior during clinical visit; contrasts behavior of sev- 
eral children awaiting examination, during physical and 
dental examinations, during I.Q. testing, and at play. 

Balloons: Aggression and Destructive Games (NYU 
20min sd) . Demonstrates special techniques in the diag- 
nosis of normal personality of children; compares a nor- 
maly aggressive, destructive boy with a suppressed normal 
boy. 

Frustration Play Techniques (NYU SOmin sd) . Shows 
blocking games; frustration and hostility games; study 
of ego development and demarcation of self in young chil- 
dren. 

Conflict Situations in Childhood (CFC 15min si) . De- 
scribes the experimental and clinical techniques of Kurt 
Levin, an outstanding psychologist, in the study of be- 
havior. 

Not One Word (PSC 15min si). This is a study of 
jealousy. A subject with striking motor ability is com- 

226 - 



List of Visual Aids 

pared with a subject of average ability, using numerous 
standardized mechanical tests. 

CHAPTER FOUR INTELLIGENCE 

Measurement of Intelligence (CFC 15min sd) . De- 
monstrates administration of the Stanford-Binet scale to a 
thirteen-year-old boy. 

Testing the /.Q. (Warden 8c Gilbert 13min si) . Shows 
administration of Form L to a five-year-old child; nature 
of test materials; scoring standards and calculation of the 

I.Q. 

CHAPTER FIVE MENTAL DEFICIENCY 

Clinical Types of Mental Defectives (PSC 30min si C) . 
Presents splendid illustrations of the main institutional 
types of mental deficiency. 

Performance Testing (Minn 34 min si) . Shows use of 
standard performance tests in examining both normal and 
feeble-minded children. 

Institutional Training (Minn 15min si) . Depicts activ- 
ities of school and kindergarten at Faribault School for 
Feeble-minded. 

Institutional Care of the Feeble-minded (Vineland 
15min si) . Modern institutional care of mental defectives 
is shown at Vineland Training School. 

The Feeble-minded (Minn 60min si) . Treats subject 
of feeble-mindedness from standpoint of pathology; men- 
tions possible organic conditions causing feeble-minded- 
ness; shows difference between morons, imbeciles, and 
idiots; describes eight major pathology groups. 

Behavior of the Feeble-minded (Stoelting lOmin si). 
Contrasts performance of two normal and two feeble- 

227 



List of Visual Aids 

minded subjects on the Healy and Fernald block-assembly 
test. 

Deficiency in Finger Schema Agnosia and Acalculia 
(PSC llmin si). Describes deficiencies in counting and 
localizing the fingers by some feeble-minded boys. 

The Differentiation of Aphasia from Mental Deficiency in 
Children (Mitrano 12min si). Compares aphasic child 
with a feeble-minded youngster; shows discrepancies be- 
tween verbal and manipulation tests and language de- 
velopment and social competence. 

CHAPTER Six THE SCHOOL CHILD 

Motor Aptitude Tests and Assembly Work (PSC 15min 
si) . Demonstrates use of seven tests of motor aptitude 
with subjects possessing mediocre and exceptional abili- 
ties; compares assembly work. 

Guidance Problem for School and Home (Columbia 
20min sd) . Case of a boy who has poor social adjustment; 
the attitude of his parents; and the role of his teacher. 

Guidance in the Public Schools (EBF 20min sd) . 
Shows some of the problems of organizing and administer- 
ing guidance in public schools. 

School (NYU 20m in sd) . Shows the work of a school 
pledged to develop self-reliance and good citizenship 
through self-government involving individual and group 
planning and executing, using the fifth-grade class as an 
example. 

CHAPTER EIGHT CAUSES OF BEHAVIOR PROBLEMS 

Experimentally Produced Neurotic Behavior in Rats 
(PSC 15min si) . Shows how rats develop abnormal 
(neurotic) behavior patterns when placed in frustrating 
situations. 

228 



List of Visual Aids 

Cradle Song (NYU lOmin sd) . Reveals the damages 
of possessive devotion to child; leads to a discussion of 
wjiy adults overprotect children and become overdepend- 
ent on the love of children. 

La Maternelle (NYU 20min sd) . Story of a neglected 
child and her attempts at compensation, revealing physical 
tensions that may develop in a maladjusted child. 

CHAPTER TWELVE JUVENILE DELINQUENTS 

As the Twig Is Bent (NYU lOmin sd) . The effect of 
good and bad home environment on the children of 
today; practical suggestions to parents on how to deal 
with many current youth problems. 

Children of the City (NYU 30min sd) . Shows how the 
problem of juvenile delinquency is approached through 
the child's home environment, using three cases of theft 
as an example. 

Juvenile Delinquents (MOT 9min sd) . Indicates the 
causes of crime and the development of juvenile delin- 
quency; suggests measures which will reduce criminal de- 
linquency. 

A Criminal Is Born (TFC 21min sd) . Shows the case 
history of three boys who develop criminal tendencies due 
to inadequate home life. 

CHAPTER THIRTEEN ADULTS 

Behavior in Hypnotic Regression (PSC 15min si) . 
Shows young woman in a deep hypnotic trance who is 
told she is a little girl again and experiencing her first 
memories; she behaves like a three-year-old, like a child 
starting school, and like other levels of growth. 

Narcosynthesis (PSC 20min si) . Shows use of drugs as 
aid in psychotherapy. 

- 229 . 



List of Visual Aids 

Prefrontal Lobotomy in Chronic Schizophrenia (PSC 
19min si) . Illustrates the improvement that can be ob- 
tained in chronic schizophrenia by presenting four cases. 

Athetoid Gestures in a Deteriorating Parergasic Schiz- 
ophrenic (PSC 6min si) . Demonstrates contrasting 
schizophrenic motility disorders. 

A Parergasic Reaction (Schizophrenia) in a Person of 
Low Intelligence (PSC 16min sd) . Shows stereotypic 
grimaces and speech vagueness, etc.; comparative study 
of motility disorders. 

Catatonic Behavior in a Deteriorated Parergasic (Schizo- 
phrenic) Patient (PSC 8min si) . Shows posture, hyper- 
trophied neck muscles, and ritualistic and stereotypic 
methods of eating. 

Symptoms in Schizophrenia (PSC 15min si). Reviews 
common symptoms of schizophrenia as they are exhibited 
by patients in the average mental hospital. 

GENERAL 

A Better Tomorrow (NYU 20min sd) . Story of chil- 
dren beginning with a preschool class through high school 
with emphasis on proper schools and training for different 
temperaments, intelligence, and abilities. 

SOURCES OF FILMS LISTED ABOVE 

BfcH Bell & Howell Company, 1801 Laichmont Ave., 
Chicago. 

CFC- College Film Center, 84 E. Randolph St., Chi- 
cago 1. 

Columbia Pictures Corp., 729 Seventh Ave., New York 19. 

Department of Labor, Children's Bureau, Washington, 
D. C. 

230 



List of Visual Aids 

EBF - Encyclopedia Britannica Films, 20 N. Wacker Dr., 
Chicago 6. 

Ideal Pictures Corp., 28 E. Eighth St., Chicago 5. 

Marvin, Donn, Ossining, New York. 

Minn University of Minnesota, Bureau of Visual In- 
struction, Minneapolis 14, Minn. 

Mitrano, A. J., 15 Glenbrook Ave., Park Hill, Yonkers, 
N.Y. 

MOT - March of Time, 369 Lexington Ave., New 
York 17. 

NYU New York University, Film Library, Washington 
Square, New York 3. 

PSC Pennsylvania State College, Psychological Cinema 
Register, State College, Pa. 

Rutgers Films, Rutgers University, Box 78, New Bruns- 
wick, N. J. 

Stocking, C. H. Company, 424 N. Homan Ave., Chicago. 

TFC - Teaching Film Custodians, 25 W. 45th St., New 
York 18. 

Vineland Training School, Vineland, N. J. 

Warden & Gilbert, Psychological Laboratory, Columbia 
University, New York. 



231 - 



Index 



Accidents, physical, 37 
Adolescence, anxiety during, 162, 
182 

biological significance of, 166 

description of, 158 

emotional growth in, 165 

glandular changes in, 160 

growth changes of, 159 

independence during, 169 

inferiority during, 176 

physical changes in, 159 

problem in mind of, 167 

school problems of, 178 

sex problems of, 167 

social concepts of, 179 

weaning during, 173 
Adoption, 59 
Adults, 199 

described, 200, 204, 206 

position in time, 200 
Affection, 1, 3, 15, 16 
Aggression, 8, 23, 24 
Aldrich, C. A., 2, 10, 19 
Ancestry, 1, 2 
Anorexia nervosa, 155 
Anxiety states, in adults, 208, 213 

in preadolescence, 150 

B 

Bakwin, Harry, 63 

Behavior problems, causes of, 108 

enuresis, 119 

food, 128 

of spoiled children, 138 

stammering, 133 



Bender, Lauretta, 87, 91 
Bernfield, Siegfried, 109, 118 
Beverly, Bert I., 40 
Biological demands, 202 
Blanton, Smiley and Gray, Margaret, 

136, 146 

Brill, A. A., 40,90,91, 144 
Brothers and sisters, 31 



Cannon, Walter B., 208, 222 
Carr-Saunders, A. M., 189, 198 
Chinese, attitude of, 27 
Chronological age, 46, 50 
College requirements, 178, 183 
Color sense, 20 
Comic books, 88 
Crying in infancy, 10, 16 

D 

Delinquency, 72 

(See also Adolescence) 
Dementia praecox, 219, 220 
Destructiveness, 3 
Deutsch, Helene, 19 
Discipline, 19, 22, 25, 26 



Education, health, 80, 91 
progressive, 81, 82 

Encephalitis, 67 

Enuresis, 119 
treatment of, 126 

Environment, 8, 202, 205 

Exhibitionism, 190 



F 

Falling, sense of, 10 



233 



Index 



Fears, 7, 8, 24, 25 

causes of, 92, 93, 96 

described, 92 

of illness, 97 

medical, 97, 98, 100 

treatment of, 95 
Fernald, Grace, 63, 70 
Food, 1, 13, 14, 21, 30, 80 

(See also Hunger) 
Force, 24, 25 
Frank, Lawrence, 185 
Frohlich's syndrome, 161 



Germany, discipline in, 28 
Gesell, Arnold, 14, 19, 43, 49, 61 
Growth, potentialities of, 1, 7, 9, 11, 
19, 47, 83, 108, 200, 202 

H 

Habit, 7, 21, 24, 35 
Hahn, Eugene, 133, 146 
Healey, William, 187, 189 
Hospitals, 19 

Hubbard, Elizabeth, 82, 91 
Hunger, 10, 13, 14, 80 
Hypothyroidism, 161 



Imitation, 26 
Independence, 85, 169 
Individuality, 1,6, 11, 83 
Infancy, frustrations of, 177 
Infant, 1,4,7,8, 10,14, 18,201 
Inferiority complex, 176 
Insecurity, 173 

Intelligence, 8, 11, 19, 41, 42, 44, 64, 
84, 164, 180, 204 

quotients of, 46, 47, 50 

tests of, 11, 44, 50 
Interests, 26 

234 



J 

Japan, discipline in, 28 

Jealousy, 31, 111 

Juvenile delinquency, 186 
causes of, 187 
exhibitionism, 190 



Laughing, 21 
Learning, 24 
Levy, David, 32, 142, 146 
Lurie, Reginald, 87, 91 

M 

Manic-depressive psychosis, 218 
Mearns, Hughes, 82, 91 
Mechanical ability, 11 
Menninger, Karl, 8, 19 
Mental deficiency, 64 

attitude toward, 68-70 

causes of, 66, 67 

incidence of, 72 

relationship of, to delinquency, 
72, 73 

training, 76 

Mental health, 1, 7, 28, 74, 179, 203 
Merrill, Maud, 44 
Moro reflex, 10 
Mother substitute, 16, 18 
Motion pictures, 87, 90, 206 
Murchuson, Carl, 187, 197 
Musical ability, 11, 52 

N 

Needs in growth, 4, 6, 7, 12, 14, 25, 

29, 83, 179, 181, 202 
Nurse as counselor, 173 
Nursery school, 34 



Obedience, 27 
Orton, Samuel, 52, 63 



Index 



Paranoid individuals, 219 
Parents, 1, 2, 8, 9, 12, 16, 26, 28, 
' 61, 69, 108, 111, 114, 116, 202 
Play, 19, 25, 27, 32, 33, 38, 39 

adulthood in, 205 

room for, 27 
Praise, 25 
Preadolescence, 88, 143, 147 

anxieties of, 150 

boys, 148 

girls, 150 
Prejudice, 206 
Prize fights, 206 
Psychosis, 218 
Psychosomatic medicine, 4 

R 

Radio, 87 

Reading difficulties, 52 
Reckless, Walter C., 188, 198 
Reflexes, 10, 11 
Reichcnberg, Wally, 73, 78 
Relationship to others, 18, 20 
Resentment, 7, 8, 25, 28 
Responsibility, 21 
Rhythm, 1, 14, 15 

S 

School nurse, 79, 81 

School problems, 53, 156, 139 

during adolescence, 180, 181 
School teachers, 26, 81, 75 
Security, 1, 6, 13, 15, 18, 31, 34, 75, 

89, 178, 181, 202 
Self-preservation, 7, 9, 34 
Self-propogation, 7 
Self-reliance, 7, 22, 36, 179, 202 
Sex education, 168, 180 

books on, 198 



Sexual aberrations, 218 

Shaw, Clifford and McKay, Henry, 

188, 197 

Shimberg, Myra, 73, 78 
Sibling rivalry (see Jealousy) 
Simon-Binet, 4 
Smiling, 11 

Social concepts, 7, 9, 179 
Somatic medicine, 208 
Spaulding, Edith R., 187, 197 
Special abilities, 178 
Speech, 19, 20 
Spelling difficulties, 52 
Spoiling, 16, 95, 138 
Stammering, 133 

Standards, 1, 7, 9, 24, 87, 108, 202 
Stealing, 142 
Superstition, 208 



Talent, 2 

Terman, Louis, 44, 63 
Temperament, 1, 12, 22 
Thumb sucking, 10, 14, 29 
Toilet habits, 1, 17,21,29 
Tredgold, A.F., 78 
Two-year-old, 20 



Visual disturbances, 153, 155 
Vitality, 1, 205 

W 

War, problems of, to adolescents, 

184 

games of, 86, 148 
Washburn, Carleton, 83, 85, 91 
Wile, Ira, 5, 68, 78 
Williams, Frankwood, 101. 106 



235